PS Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
19D2DJ-126-PS
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
RAM2500/3500
RAM 2500/3500
2019
DID_19ps_Ram_Truck_2500-3500_Owner_Manual_EN-US_062218.indd 1 6/22/18 4:36 PM
DID_19ps_Ram_Truck_2500-3500_Owner_Manual_EN-US_062218.indd 1 6/22/18 4:36 PM
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright
© 2019 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................................................13
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .........................................................................................................................................16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..............................................................................................................160
4 SAFETY .................................................................................................................................................................................................195
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ......................................................................................................................................................290
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..............................................................................................................................................................440
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................................................499
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................................564
9 MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................................................................................................................................575
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .............................................................................................................................................................673
11 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................................678
2
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................13
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................14
Essential Information....................................................14
Symbols...........................................................................14
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................15
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ................................15
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ...........15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED......................16
KEYS .....................................................................................18
Key Fob ...........................................................................18
IGNITION SWITCH .........................................................25
Keyless Push Button Ignition.......................................25
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED..................................27
How To Use Remote Start............................................27
Remote Start Abort Message........................................28
To Enter Remote Start Mode........................................28
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ............................................................................29
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle..... 29
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.........29
General Information .....................................................29
SENTRY KEY .......................................................................30
Key Programming ........................................................30
Replacement Keys ........................................................31
General Information .....................................................31
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM .......................................32
To Arm The System.......................................................32
To Disarm The System..................................................32
Rearming Of The System..............................................33
Security System Manual Override ..............................33
DOORS .................................................................................33
Manual Door Locks .......................................................33
Power Door Locks — If Equipped .............................35
Power Side Steps — If Equipped ..............................35
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ........................36
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .....................39
Child-Protection Door Lock ........................................39
SEATS ................................................................................40
Manual Front Seat Adjustment....................................41
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment.....................................42
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped.........43
Driver Memory Seats — If Equipped .......................45
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........................................49
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................50
3
HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................................................51
Front Head Restraints...................................................52
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ................................53
Rear Head Restraint Removal .....................................54
STEERING WHEEL .........................................................54
Tilt Steering Column ...................................................54
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .....................55
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED .....56
MIRRORS ............................................................................57
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .................57
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ............58
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped ................................................59
Outside Mirrors ............................................................59
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped.....................................................................60
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ....................................60
Power Convex Mirror Switch — If Equipped...........61
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped .....................62
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .................................63
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped..............63
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped..........................................64
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped ................66
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..........................................................67
Multifunction Lever ......................................................67
Headlight Switch ...........................................................67
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped ......68
High/Low Beam Switch...............................................68
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped.....................................................................68
Flash-To-Pass ................................................................69
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................69
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................................70
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)........................................70
Headlight Delay.............................................................70
Lights-On Reminder......................................................70
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................71
Turn Signals ................................................................71
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................71
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped............72
Battery Saver...................................................................73
INTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................73
Courtesy Lights..............................................................73
Illuminated Entry ..........................................................76
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ....................76
Windshield Wipers ......................................................76
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .........................78
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................................................79
Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
Overview ......................................................................79
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview....83
Climate Control Functions...........................................90
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................91
Operating Tips ..............................................................91
WINDOWS ..........................................................................94
Power Windows ...........................................................94
Wind Buffeting ..............................................................97
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ...........................97
Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............97
HOOD .............................................................................101
To Open The Hood .....................................................101
To Close The Hood......................................................102
TAILGATE .........................................................................102
Opening ........................................................................102
Closing ..........................................................................103
Bed Step — If Equipped .............................................103
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ............104
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink ...........105
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................108
Using HomeLink .........................................................110
Security .........................................................................110
Troubleshooting Tips..................................................110
General Information....................................................110
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...............................................111
Storage...........................................................................111
Cupholders ..................................................................122
Electrical Power Outlets ............................................124
Power Inverter — If Equipped .................................126
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ...................129
Overhead Sunglass Storage........................................130
PICKUP BOX .....................................................................130
Cargo Camera — If Equipped ...................................132
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED.............................................134
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins...............134
RamBox Safety Warning.............................................137
Bed Divider — If Equipped........................................138
Bed Rail Tie-Down System .......................................142
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .......................................................144
Camper Applications ..................................................144
EASY-OFF TAILGATE ....................................................144
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And Remote
Keyless Entry................................................................144
Removing The Tailgate...............................................146
Locking Tailgate...........................................................146
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED .......147
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal.............................147
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ........................153
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................159
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..............160
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions....161
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER...........................163
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions .............164
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .............................165
Instrument Cluster Display Controls .......................165
Oil Life Reset ...............................................................167
Display Menu Items....................................................169
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped ................................................................177
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ........................179
Red Warning Lights ....................................................179
Yellow Warning Lights...............................................184
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................188
Green Indicator Lights................................................190
White Indicator Lights................................................191
Blue Indicator Lights...................................................192
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........192
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...............................................................193
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .....................................................................193
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES .........................................................195
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................195
Electronic Brake Control System ..............................196
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..................................208
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ........208
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
If Equipped...................................................................216
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..............220
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........................230
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ......................230
Important Safety Precautions.....................................230
Seat Belt Systems .........................................................231
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....................245
Child Restraints ..........................................................258
Transporting Pets ......................................................286
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................................286
Transporting Passengers ............................................286
Exhaust Gas ..............................................................286
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..........................................................................287
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...................................................................289
6
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..............................................290
Automatic Transmission ............................................291
Tip Start Feature .........................................................291
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.................................291
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button .........................................................................292
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..... 296
After Starting................................................................296
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..............297
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ............297
PARKING BRAKE ...........................................................298
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...................................299
Ignition Park Interlock................................................301
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ...........301
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission ....................301
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ...............................308
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................309
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case — If Equipped ...................................................309
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped.....314
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —
IF EQUIPPED.....................................................................317
Description....................................................................317
Air Suspension Modes ................................................318
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......................320
Operation ......................................................................320
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)....................................320
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
ONLY ................................................................................322
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY .................................................................................324
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ............................................................324
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand .............................326
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)............................................................................327
Hill Climbing................................................................329
Driving Through Water..............................................331
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving .........................332
Vehicle Recovery .........................................................333
After Driving Off-Road...............................................336
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ....................................337
7
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................337
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch............337
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch .........339
Winch Accessories ......................................................341
Operating Your Winch ..............................................341
Rigging Techniques ....................................................352
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED ........354
SPEED CONTROL ...........................................................354
To Activate ...................................................................355
To Set A Desired Speed ..............................................355
To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................355
To Accelerate For Passing .........................................356
To Resume Speed ........................................................357
To Deactivate................................................................357
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ..................................................................357
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation.............359
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)............360
To Activate/Deactivate ..............................................360
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................................361
To Cancel ......................................................................362
To Turn Off...................................................................362
To Resume ....................................................................362
To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................363
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ..................364
Overtake Aid ................................................................367
ACC Operation At Stop..............................................367
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu.....................368
Display Warnings And Maintenance .......................369
Precautions While Driving With ACC .....................371
General Information....................................................375
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode...........376
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................379
ParkSense Sensors........................................................379
ParkSense Warning Display.......................................380
ParkSense Display .......................................................380
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........................385
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System.....385
Cleaning The ParkSense System................................386
ParkSense System Usage Precautions.......................386
8
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST .....387
ParkSense Sensors .......................................................388
ParkSense Warning Display ......................................388
ParkSense Display.......................................................389
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense......................................................................394
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist
System ...........................................................................394
Cleaning The ParkSense System ...............................395
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ......................395
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................397
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................401
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE ..........408
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................................410
VEHICLE LOADING ....................................................410
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ....................410
Payload..........................................................................410
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........................410
Tire Size.........................................................................410
Rim Size ........................................................................410
Inflation Pressure.........................................................410
Curb Weight.................................................................411
Loading .........................................................................411
TRAILER TOWING ........................................................411
Common Towing Definitions ....................................412
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ...........................................................................417
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................................418
Trailer And Tongue Weight .....................................418
Towing Requirements ................................................418
Towing Tips .................................................................426
SNOWPLOW ....................................................................427
2500/3500 Models Only..............................................427
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,
ETC.) ...................................................................................430
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ........430
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models...........................................................................431
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models...........................................................................432
DRIVING TIPS...................................................................436
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................................436
Driving Through Water .............................................437
Off-Road Driving Tips ..............................................438
9
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .............................440
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..............441
BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................................446
Replacement Bulbs .....................................................446
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ............................................447
FUSES..................................................................................457
Power Distribution Center.........................................458
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........................469
Jack Location ................................................................470
Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................................470
Removing The Spare Tire...........................................473
Preparations For Jacking ............................................476
Jacking Instructions.....................................................477
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ......................................483
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............................485
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped ..............487
JUMP STARTING ............................................................488
Preparations For Jump Start ......................................489
Jump Starting Procedure............................................490
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION...............................................................492
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..................................493
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ......................................494
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...............................495
Two-Wheel Drive Models ..........................................497
Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................................497
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped....................498
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...............................................................498
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).................................498
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ............................................499
Maintenance Plan ........................................................500
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...............................503
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ..........................................504
6.4L Engine ..................................................................504
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine ...........................505
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................505
Maintenance-Free Battery ..........................................506
10
DEALER SERVICE ...........................................................506
Engine Oil — Gas Engine ..........................................507
Engine Oil Filter .........................................................509
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........................................509
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................511
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................................516
Body Lubrication .......................................................517
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................................517
Exhaust System ...........................................................520
Cooling System ...........................................................522
Brake System ...............................................................527
Automatic Transmission ............................................528
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ..........................................................................529
Transfer Case ...............................................................530
HOISTING .........................................................................531
TIRES ..................................................................................531
Tire Safety Information ............................................531
Tires — General Information ...................................541
Tire Types .....................................................................547
Spare Tires — If Equipped .....................................548
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................................551
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................................552
Tire Rotation Recommendations ..............................553
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...............................................555
Treadwear.....................................................................556
Traction Grades............................................................556
Temperature Grades ...................................................556
STORING THE VEHICLE .............................................557
BODYWORK......................................................................557
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ....................557
Body And Underbody Maintenance.........................558
Preserving The Bodywork..........................................558
INTERIORS .......................................................................561
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................................561
Plastic And Coated Parts ............................................562
Leather Parts.................................................................563
Glass Surfaces ..............................................................563
11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...............................................564
Vehicle Identification Number .................................564
BRAKE SYSTEM ...............................................................565
Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon) ...............................................565
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .....565
Torque Specifications ................................................565
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................567
6.4L Engine ...................................................................567
Reformulated Gasoline ..........................................568
Materials Added To Fuel ..........................................568
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................................568
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............569
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications................569
MMT In Gasoline.........................................................569
Fuel System Cautions..................................................570
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...................................570
FLUID CAPACITIES ....................................................571
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .........................................572
Engine ...........................................................................572
Chassis ........................................................................574
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................575
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR .........................................575
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................576
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................................................578
Uconnect 3 Settings .....................................................578
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings.............................597
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display
Settings ..........................................................................621
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................642
Radio Operation...........................................................642
Media Mode..................................................................642
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ........643
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .........647
Regulatory And Safety Information .........................648
12
VOICE COMMANDS .....................................................649
Introducing Uconnect .................................................649
Get Started ....................................................................649
Basic Voice Commands ..............................................650
Radio .............................................................................652
Media.............................................................................654
Phone.............................................................................656
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped...............................658
Climate (4C/4C NAV)................................................660
Navigation (4C NAV) .................................................661
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) —
If Equipped...................................................................663
Register (4C/4C NAV) ...............................................664
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV).........................................664
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)...............................665
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ....................................666
Using Do Not Disturb ................................................668
Android Auto — If Equipped ...................................668
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..................................670
General Information....................................................671
Additional Information ..............................................672
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ................................672
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................................673
Prepare For The Appointment...................................673
Prepare A List...............................................................673
Be Reasonable With Requests ....................................673
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .........................................673
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................................674
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................674
In Mexico Contact........................................................674
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........................674
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................................................675
Service Contract ..........................................................675
WARRANTY INFORMATION.......................................676
MOPAR PARTS.................................................................676
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...................................676
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.......676
In Canada......................................................................677
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...................................677
13
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional
passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently
from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped,
the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or
use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive
vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle
controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, trans-
mission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience. When driving off-road, or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the
vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always
observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever
you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-
mented by Warranty Information, and customer oriented
documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will find a
description of the services that FCA offers to its customers,
the Warranty Certificate and the details of the terms and
conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time
to read all of these publications carefully before driving your
vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recom-
mendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual
will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related to
the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased.
Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Informa-
tion, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will
1
14 INTRODUCTION
be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data
contained in this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it
reserves the right to make changes to the model described for
technical and/or commercial reasons. For further informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE:
After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and remain with
the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations
may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose
symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
INTRODUCTION 15
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van conver-
sion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S. residents
refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Cana-
dian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information book. Such equipment includes
video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For
warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the
applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by
the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing,
please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-
sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support.
For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your Ucon-
nect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Ucon-
nect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the
vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in
motion, the system will display: Feature not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Pre-Installed Features
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no app
to download, no phone to connect and no external device
needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year,
in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
Tip:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your
Favorites, for easy access in the future.
Your User Guide —
Updated in real-time
Available when and where
you need it
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface
Maintenance schedules and
information
Multilingual
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary
Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
2
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The
Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate,
and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the Panic
Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using
a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
• In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons will work
until the vehicle reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The key fob should not be placed next to the wireless
charging pad (if equipped).
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of
a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted, a
back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emer-
gency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Settings are
setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors.
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn
signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowl-
edge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off.
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you are in the
vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm system.
Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm system acti-
vated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock button
to deactivate the vehicle security alarm system.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic
button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the
interior lights will turn on.
2
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is
activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle
when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to
the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle) — If
Equipped
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be
lowered by pushing the key fob air suspension
lowering button two times. When key fob lowering
is requested, the vehicle will send a series of chirps and
flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun
and will continue these alerts until it successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) ride
height.
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• All doors must be closed.
• The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
Canceling Remote Lowering
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle
lowering is canceled, the vehicle will raise up to the next
defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature until
the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspension
lowering button one time during the lowering process.
When vehicle lowering is canceled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
NOTE:
Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With Remote
Control
The replacement battery model is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing and holding the
release button located on the side of the key fob while
pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Release button
2
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Slightly remove the emergency key from the key fob,
approximately 10 mm. The blade of the emergency key
should just become visible.
Emergency Key
3. Holding the key fob with the button side facing down,
use the emergency key to pry up the battery cover until
the cover releases from the key fob housing.
Key Fob Back Cover Removal
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
4. Remove the battery by using the emergency key to pry
the battery out of its housing.
Key Fob Battery Removal
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the + sign on the battery
is facing upward. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by pushing the new battery down on
an angle toward the top edge of the opening. Then, push
down on the remainder of the battery to lock into place.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge of the
back cover with the top of the fob, and press the edges
into the interlocking hinges until all edges snap together
with no large visual gaps.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
2
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Alternative Back Cover Removal Method:
The back cover of the key fob can also be removed by
inserting the emergency key into the left or right side open
slots, and twisting to pop off the cover.
Alternate Key Fob Back Cover Removal Method
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating posi-
tions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illumi-
nate.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of
a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this
situation, a back up method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP
button, with your foot applied on the brake pedal, and push
to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition position or
from a remote start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of
a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this
situation, a back up method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emer-
gency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
Back Up Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system
from starting the vehicle.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting And Operating"
for further information.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine
will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined
area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
2
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The parking lights
will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will
chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started,
the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will
automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle
will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote
Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation
(if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition
must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable
with a one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm
the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in
cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN mode.
NOTE:
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deac-
tivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information on
Remote Start Comfort System operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and
a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system
cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addi-
tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indi-
cates that someone attempted to start the engine with an
invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec-
tronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob
is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any
other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key
fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position.
2
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, tail-
gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the
vehicle security alarm is activated, interior switches for door
locks are disabled. The system will turn the horn off after 29
seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
"Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information).
•Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF."
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
•Push lock button on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door
Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior
zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive Entry" in
"Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power
door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the
doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in the
instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate that the system is armed.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the
following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid
key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle. If equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for
further information.
3. Place the ignition out of the “OFF” position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle secu-
rity alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if you lock/
unlock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob
down. The lock knobs will unlock when the interior handle
is used to open the doors.
Door Lock Knob
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed.
2
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as
when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn
the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and
lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switches are on each front door trim
panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
While in the ACC or ON/RUN positions, if you push the
power door lock switch, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from acci-
dentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the
key fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier entry and
exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side Steps
will deploy when either the driver’s or passenger’s side door
is opened, or when the deploy setting is activated through
the touchscreen. When configured for “Store” mode, the
steps will stay in their position but can also be deployed
manually through the radio.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if the retract
setting is selected in the touchscreen, the steps will retract.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for additional
information.
2
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s
Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensi-
tivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is
opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by
pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons (if
equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block
the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the passive entry
handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle
to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle
is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob
In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive
Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will
function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch
is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been
closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle
for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's
Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no
other valid Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all
vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third
attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob
can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using
either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system depends on a key fob that is not
fully discharged of its coin battery capacity.
• The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the key fob
battery is low or fully depleted, but a low key fob battery
condition will still support the Passive Entry system func-
tionality. When the key fob battery is low, the instrument
cluster will display a message indicating that the key fob
battery is low. Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-
rior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door
lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front
door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been
shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven
(shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear
seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have the
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage
and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the system
on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in
the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened from
the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and
lift the lever. Release the lever once the seat back is in the
upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On some
models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily folds
down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating
the handle. The seatback may swing forward and hit
you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver's seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver's seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement of
the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
2
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four direc-
tions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of
the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rear-
ward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious injury
or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its
ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may
be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Driver Memory Seats — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through memory buttons.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets. Your
remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key fob can
be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be
linked to memory position 2.
2
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The driver memory seat buttons are located on the driver
door, next to the door handle.
Driver Memory Seat Buttons
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
(i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped), and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display
will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to
"Programming The Memory Feature" in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10
seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory settings by
pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory buttons on the door panel, push memory button
(1).
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the key
fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory buttons on the door panel, push memory button
(2).
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the key
fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is canceled,
the driver's seat and the power pedals (if equipped) stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
2
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you
have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the key
fob from the ignition.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition, the
driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward
if the driver’s seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when you place the
ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition, the
driver’s seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is
between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ-
ously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC
or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit
to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy
Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle
is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is
enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable
features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are located on the center
instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s
seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns due
to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
2
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indi-
cator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
• Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two
to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air
from the passenger compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and
front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The
fans operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also
located within the climate or controls screen of the touch-
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose
MED.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn the
ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of your head.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate
a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the head
restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired and
release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull the top of
the head restraint to the forward most position and release.
The head restraint will return to the rear most position.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, the center
head restraint is not adjustable or removable.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of head restraint, and push down-
ward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable
head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has only one
adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a
tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate
a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate
height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be
folded up.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column,
below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when
it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center instrument panel below the touchscreen, as well as
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the
heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to
turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insu-
lates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel
covers of any type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat posi-
tion. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to
move toward or away from the driver to provide improved
position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The
following messages will appear on vehicles equipped with
an instrument cluster display if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out: “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the
best possible seat/pedal position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can
use your remote keyless entry key fob or the memory
switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the adjust-
able pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the small control under the mirror to the night posi-
tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-
shield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to the
pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
2
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
on.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn the
feature off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counter-
clockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video display
illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view
camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto dimming
feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under the
outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the Uconnect
display. For further information, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia”.
2
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically
adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver's
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not
have a convex passenger side mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Mirror Direction Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button
to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
Power Convex Mirror Switch — If Equipped
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the door trim
panel, above the power mirror controls. The switch enables
the movement of the convex portion of both the driver and
passenger outside mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors, push the
Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select the mirror you
want to adjust by using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.
2
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power
Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a second
time, the switch will automatically default back to the larger
portion of the outside mirrors after a period of time.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head
to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide
loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror
head should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an
automated car wash.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and
can be adjusted separately.
Blindspot Mirror
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not turned on
when delivered from the factory.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electri-
cally folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between
the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the
switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a
second time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically
fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to its normal driving (home) position.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to the full retract position (this may require multiple
button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while the
vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you
attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds they may
not fully open or close. You should slow down to a
moderate speed and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times in
one minute the system shuts down for one minute to
protect the motors from over heating.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
2
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instru-
ment panel. This switch controls the operation of the head-
lights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped,
instrument panel light dimming, cargo light — if equipped,
and fog lights — if equipped.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light, and instrument panel light operation.
2
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
PARK. This provides a constant "lights on" condition until
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal acti-
vation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
lamp will illuminate.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunc-
tion lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of
view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim High
Beams” within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning
the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of
vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain
on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause
the system to function improperly.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight posi-
tion.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until the vehicle
is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal oper-
ation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be deactivated through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the
headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position aligning
the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch. When
the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.
This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Auto-
matic System off, turn the headlight switch counterclockwise
to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will come
on in the Automatic mode.
2
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
from the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch clock-
wise to the first detent. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addi-
tion, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned
off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight
delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned off while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then off,
or by turning the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
low beam headlights and push in the center of the headlight
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control
knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on
each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very
fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an
indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left)
will flash three times then automatically turn off.
2
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) and trailer
spotter lamps (if equipped) are turned on by pushing the
cargo lights button located on the lower half of the headlight
switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
If the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these lights can also
be turned on using the switch located just inside the pickup
box, on the lower part of the bed light lens. A telltale will illu-
minate in the instrument cluster display when these lights
are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights
off.
Bed Light Switch In Truck Bed
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for
approximately 30 seconds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of California or
Mississippi, the Cargo, Bed, and Mirror Spotter lights will
not work while the vehicle is in motion. In every other state,
the Cargo and Mirror Spotter lights will turn off when the
vehicle is in motion, but the Bed Light will remain on. In all
states, including California and Mississippi, if a bed camera
is deactivated, the Bed Lights will turn back on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding is
provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF, the interior lights will automatically
turn off when:
• Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
• The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
• The Cargo, Bed, and Spotter lights are manually activated
by either the headlight switch or the truck bed switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
The Courtesy, Dome, Cargo, and Bed Lights are turned on
when any door is opened or the Dome On button is pushed
on the overhead console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped
with Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the Courtesy, Dome, Cargo, and Bed Lights
will turn on.
2
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated individu-
ally as reading lights by pushing the corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead console, if both
the Dome On and Dome Defeat buttons are pushed, the Illu-
minated Entry with door ajar feature will be disabled, but the
Dome Lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
Two types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights are available for
your vehicle:
• Push button on/off
• Push lens on/off
Push Lens On/Off Rear Courtesy Light
1 — Dome Defeat Button
2 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
4 — Dome On Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
The Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been
turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior lights are
left on after the ignition is turned off, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will
adjust the interior and ambient light levels.
NOTE:
• The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further details.
• The ambient lights are only active when the headlights or
parking lights are on.
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Entry
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob to
unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the puddle lamps located beneath
the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or
they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the Dome On button on the over-
head console is pushed.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the Dome
Defeat button on the overhead console is pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Approach lights
under the outside mirrors, they can also be turned off by
pushing the Dome Defeat button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate
the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use
when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the
first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it
enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between
cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the
wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob
is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in
the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approxi-
mately three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located on
the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent
and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automati-
cally shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; there-
fore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The
wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield
with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automat-
ically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is espe-
cially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this
feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multi-
function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive,
and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Position 3
should be used for normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2
can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Posi-
tions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensi-
tivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper
switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than
32°F (0°C).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL posi-
tion, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not oper-
ational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once
the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition
switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing wiper operation
can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen, or
on the instrument panel below the radio.
Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen Overview
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials
and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to
obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
2
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Rotate the temperature control knob until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and puts the
A/C to maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C
system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the
system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from
the off position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Mode Control
Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the
temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster turns off after a short
period of time.
Icon Description
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Temperature Controls
2
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Control Descriptions
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equip-
ment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Icon Description
MAX A/C
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and
the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Control Knob
A/C Button
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
2
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO Control
Knob
AUTO Button
AUTO
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after ten minutes.
Icon Description
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the
faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or
press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an auto-
matic climate control system.
SYNC
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
2
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Blower Control
Knob
Blower Control
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counter-
clockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch display radios, pressing the blower control button below one
turns the Climate Control system OFF.
Mode Control
Knob
Mode Controls
Button
Modes Control
Control Knob: Push the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Icon Description
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Icon Description
2
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level,
or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor
or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C
system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radi-
ator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior
settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will
cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if condi-
tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
tion automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
2
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause
window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost
or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as
fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the
heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.
Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with
warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected
in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air
filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
2
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Controls
Power Window Switches
The power window controls located on the driver's door trim
panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip control
of all power windows. There is a single opening and closing
switch on the front passenger door for passenger window
control and on the rear doors for rear window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is
opened.
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door
is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push to the switch to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the
first detent and release when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during the Auto-Closure,
it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto
reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this
happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to
close the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may
need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door allows you
to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors,
push the window lock switch into the latched or down posi-
tion. To enable the window controls, push the window lock
switch again and return the switch to the released or up posi-
tion.
Window Lockout Switch
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
Push the switch rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch
forward to close the glass.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock
to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,
or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the
front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped
The power sunroof switches are located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
2
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is called
“Express Open.” During Express Open operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward. The
sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at full
open position. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob
in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be
seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close opera-
tion, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward. The
sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condi-
tion until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-
sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your
vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,
or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then
open the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will auto-
matically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof
must be closed in Manual Mode.
2
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof posi-
tion. During Express Vent operation, any other actuation of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when the
“Express Operation” feature stops working. To reset the
sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC or the ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the close switch. The sunroof will hit the
hard stop and move to the vent position after ten seconds.
4. Release the close switch.
5. Push and hold the close switch again within five seconds
to begin the teaching process. The sunroof will complete
one full cycle and return to the fully closed position.
NOTE:
If the close switch is released anytime during the teach cycle,
the procedure will need to be repeated starting from the first
step.
6. Once the sunroof has stopped in the fully closed position,
release the close switch. The sunroof is now reset and
ready to use.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
2
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Close The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the
engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
TAILGATE
Opening
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate
release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to the open
position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an electronic
release feature for the tailgate, allowing hands-free
tailgate opening. To activate, push and release the
Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice within five
seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch, and slowly lower
into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead console inside
the vehicle can be used to release the tailgate.
NOTE:
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover (if equipped) may prevent Elec-
tronic Tailgate Release if installed. The Tonneau Cover must
be removed or folded up before releasing the tailgate. Refer
to “Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover — If Equipped” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Closing
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
latched.
NOTE:
Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to ensure it is
securely latched.
Bed Step — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable bed step
on the driver’s side of the tailgate to provide easier entry and
exit into the truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the protruding
foot tab located on the left edge of the bed step, and push
rearward. A small amount of force will release the spring
load, and extend the bed step out and away from the tailgate.
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will extend
out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position that will avoid
coming into contact with the step as it extends.
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
2
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push the bed
step forward with your foot until the bed step is retracted by
the spring load.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit
is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located on the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink channels.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your hands.
The low clearance space between the bed step and the
rear bumper as the bed step returns to the stowed
position could result in injury to your hands or fingers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE:
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at Home-
Link.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not
program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
2
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified
by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close
the door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after
the LEARN button has been pushed.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed Home-
Link button twice (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener/device activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the
button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the
training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, re-
peat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps."
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
2
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that
require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several
seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to
time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or
gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
2
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all chan-
nels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are
some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-held
transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
NOTE:
Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over the upper
storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove compartment, push
the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button (If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
2
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both an upper and lower
storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power
outlet located at the rear of the area that can be used to power
small electrical devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets”
for further information.
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the armrest
could be seriously injured during vehicle operation, or
a collision. Only use the center seating position when
the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight of
the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg). These
items could be thrown about endangering occupants of
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a total of 10
lbs (4.5 kg).
2
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open
the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains a power
inverter outlet located in the forward portion of the lower
bin. There is also a “fill line” located long the rear inside wall
of the lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may interfere
with cupholder placement if equipped with a premium
center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two front
storage bins located in front of the center storage compart-
ment. These storage bins may be equipped with tandem
doors. Push the front bin to access the cupholders. Or push
the rear bin to access the coinholder/small storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the cupholder bin to
slide tray rearward for access of front lower storage bin, or
forward to access the rear lower storage bin with the center
console lid in the open position.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
2
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, storage
can be found by folding down the center seat back. A console
storage area and cupholders are available. With the seatback
in the upright position, lifting the seat bottom also reveals a
storage location.
Front Bench Seat Storage
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the
instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access
button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the
access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully
open position.
Storage Drawer
1 — Access Button
2 — Storage Drawer
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins have
removable liners that can be easily removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
2
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open
the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for securing cargo.
These hooks should be used to secure loads safely when the
vehicle is moving.
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks
NOTE:
The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lbs (113 kg).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the
length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped
with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the
load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp
turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may move
around with force and strike occupants, resulting in
serious or fatal injury.
2
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into posi-
tion.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under The
Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
Crew Cab — If Equipped
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious injury.
2
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the
rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid.
Crew Cab Storage
NOTE:
For more information on storage and the fold flat floor, refer
to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
For vehicles equipped with a center console, two cupholders
are located in front of the console storage bin.
Front Cupholders
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a premium center console
with double (tandem) doors, push the front bin door to
access the cupholders.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section of
the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
Front Cupholders With Bench Seat
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located in
the center armrest.
Rear Armrest Cupholder
2
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that
consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.
Rear Cup Wells
Electrical Power Outlets
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the stan-
dard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and 5
Volt (2.5 Amp) USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached
to the outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/RUN
or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The battery
symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery,
and can provide power at all times.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps)
at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be
replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not insert any other object in the power outlets as this
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray on top of
the center stack. This power outlet only works when the
vehicle is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
• F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear Center
Console
• F90Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet
Battery Fed (If Equipped)
• F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet Igni-
tion Fed (If Equipped)
• F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument Panel
Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any equip-
ment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All accessories
connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may
be located inside the center console towards the right hand
side, just under the Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped).
This inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) power
inverter located on the rear of the center console. This
inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accesso-
ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a suffi-
cient length of time to allow the generator to recharge
the vehicle's battery.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
All power inverters are designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. If
three outlets are in use, 400 Watts is shared amongst the
devices plugged in.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may
be located inside the ram box of your vehicle. The inverter
can be turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter
switch located to the left of the steering wheel. This inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power
devices requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Ram Box Power Inverter
2
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
If equipped, there may be a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)
inverter located to the right of the center stack, just below the
climate controls. This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power up
to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
Center Stack Power Inverter
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
• The Power Inverter only turns on if the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
• Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless
charging pad located inside of the center console just below
the CD player (if equipped). This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a stan-
dard that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your
mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a specialized
back plate can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or an local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip mat,
an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in place and
an LED indicator light.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad or
within 15 cm (150 mm) of it. Doing so can cause excessive
heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the vehicle
from starting.
2
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and
convenience.
Pick Up Box Features
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
(Continued)
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or Headache
Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must use Mopar Box
Reinforcement Brackets that are available from an autho-
rized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the
box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings
and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel hous-
ings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the
pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg)
total.
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result
in vehicle damage. If wide building materials are to be
frequently carried, the installation of a support is
recommended. This will restrain the cargo and transfer
the load to the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of mate-
rial suspended above the wheelhouse, supports must
be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the
pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. The use
of proper supports will permit loading up to the rated
payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an acci-
dent causing serious or fatal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that
allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box.
The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of the
center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen button to indicate the current active camera
image being displayed is made available whenever the
Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button to switch the display to rear view
camera image is made available whenever the Cargo Camera
image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE
gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image is
displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to
disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously until
the touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the Cargo
Camera image is pressed.
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available With
Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the
Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of the
pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,
and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through the
Uconnect settings by pressing the Cargo Camera soft button,
followed by the “Dynamic Centerline” soft button on the
touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay
will display anytime the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button located in the
bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally or
vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the “Accept”
button to set the centerline to the newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be deac-
tivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is deactivated.
It can also be manually deactivated through the Uconnect
settings.
For further information, refer to “Surround View Camera” in
“Starting And Operating.”
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect 4C/
4C NAV
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn the Cargo
Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button, the Cargo
Camera image will be displayed until the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h) and the 10 second timer
runs out. The image may be deactivated by pressing the "X"
soft button, turning the ignition OFF, placing the gear
selector in PARK, or pressing the image defeat [X] button. On
deactivation, the previous selected screen will appear.
2
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage and
cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo divider
• Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 300 lbs (136 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly
secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lbs (136 kg) for
2500 and 3500 series vehicles per bin.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and
release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will
open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is pushed if the
RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic illumi-
nation switch, there is a manual on/off switch located at the
rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch once will turn off
the bin lights, pushing the switch again will turn the lights
back on.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could
cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid is
required to stay open for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually
using the on/off switch.
2
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and
shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob to
lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if
equipped). Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further details. The RamBox storage bins can be
locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage
bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the push button and
turn clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock.
Always return the key to the upright (vertical) position
before removing the key from the push button.
CAUTION!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be mini-
mized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with appro-
priate padding.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
RamBox Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever —
If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage
bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the
bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
WARNING!
• Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle
is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins.
Once in the storage bin, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the storage
bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
2
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bed Divider — If Equipped
The bed divider has two functional positions:
• Storage Position
• Divider Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the front of the
truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in
use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position, perform
the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle
key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the
divider side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
2. With the side gates open, position the divider fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends to
be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Cargo Tie Down Loop
2
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the
panel into place.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed.
There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which
allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position, perform the
following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle
key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the
divider side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
2. With the side gates open, position the divider so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of
the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are
secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
2
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
NOTE:
This feature is available for vehicles both equipped, or not
equipped, with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that
can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the
detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo properly
secure.
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to the
cleat or cleat rail may occur.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out
on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired loca-
tion. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten
the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end cap
screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30 Torx
head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
end of the rail.
Utility Rail End Cap
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper
Loading” document at www.ramtrucks.com. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle, an
alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) must
be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang, the
tailgate can be removed.
NOTE:
The electric connector at the bottom of the tailgate must be
disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And Remote Keyless
Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote
Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing
inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and
insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove compart-
ment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the
terminals do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
2
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and or
power locks (if equipped).
NOTE:
Refer to “Disconnecting The Rear Camera And Remote
Keyless Entry” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot
clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
Locking Tailgate
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock button.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau
Cover which consists of different features:
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
• Tonneau fore aft locator
• Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking capability
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured at the front
of the box without removing it completely.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover, follow the next steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the underside of the
cover (left and right side).
Clamped Position
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the Tonneau
Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
3. From the released position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper up.
Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp wire are
in the proper stowed position. If the clamp and clamp
wire are not properly stowed, damage to the Tonneau
Cover material will result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel (intermediate
position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is in
this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the front panel
(Tri-Folded position).
Tri-Folded Position
2
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•When folding the center and rear panels, the sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover
material.
•It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the
Tonneau Cover in the Tri-Folded position.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to allow the
panels to drop under their own weight.
6. Once on the Tri-Folded position, pull both front clamp
handles down to the Released Position.
Released Position
2
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper up.
Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
8. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the Tonneau Cover
panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely
before removing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the cover forward against the front of the truck bed.
The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on the
vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the
clamps from the stowed position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of the box (or
flange of the Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi
clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
2
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not improperly
attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the intermediate
position.
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is in
this position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the sections MUST
be held together to avoid damage to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
2
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the released posi-
tion.
Stowed Position
2
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
Semi Clamped Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially clamped
to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking hole.
Locking Hole
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar White-
wall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather & Vinyl Condi-
tioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
2
160
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
•Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
•When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the gauge indi-
cates the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged.
If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
•When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
•The pointer should always indicate the oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil pressure indica-
tion of zero is normal during an Autostop.
5. Speedometer
•Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Fuel Gauge
•The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
3
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Temperature Gauge
•The gauge pointer shows engine coolant temperature.
The pointer positioned within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
•The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Servicing And Maintenance.” Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Cluster
3
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
•Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
•Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
•The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
•The gauge pointer shows engine coolant temperature.
The pointer positioned within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
•The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Servicing And Maintenance.” Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn
the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer
for service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Trailer Tow
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Set Up
• Commercial Settings — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
•Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
•Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
•Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access/
select the information screens or submenu screens
of a main menu item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow
button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
•Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access/
select the information screens, submenu screens of
a main menu item, or to return to the main menu.
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator
system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in
the instrument cluster display after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure.
3
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,”
then push and release the right arrow button to reset the
Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instru-
ment cluster display screen.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Display Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the direc-
tional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle
Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure
• Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
• Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Pressure
• Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
• Turbo Boost — If Equipped
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
• Battery Voltage
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped
• Engine Hours
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
system.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC
system status.
3
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not
been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument
cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel
Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset
Average Fuel Economy.
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge
• Average Fuel Economy Value
• Range To Empty
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip
menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to enter the
submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B infor-
mation will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button and
the next screen will display the following trailer trip infor-
mation:
• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right
arrow button to reset the distance.
• Trailer Brake
•Output
•Type
•Gain
• Trailer Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist name, and
audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous media
source information displayed on the screen. When the
pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the
last used screen.
3
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow buttons to cycle through stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Current Gear
• Off (Default Setting)
• On
Odometer
• Unit Without Decimal (Default Setting)
• Unit With Decimal
Favorite Menu
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide) — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
• Trip Info (Show/Hide)
• Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Commercial Settings — If Equipped
NOTE:
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the OK button to choose
whether to show or hide this menu in the instrument cluster
display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (Default Setting) — If Equipped
• Outside Temp — If Equipped
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip — If Equipped
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
• Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Temperature — If Equipped
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Life — If Equipped
• Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
• Turbo Boost — If Equipped
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Upper Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Audio
• Speedometer (Default Setting)
• Menu Title
3
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Right
• None
• Compass — If Equipped
• Outside Temp (Default Setting) — If Equipped
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip — If Equipped
• Trailer Brake — If Equipped
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
• Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Temperature — If Equipped
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
• Oil Life — If Equipped
• Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
• Turbo Boost — If Equipped
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Left Side — If Equipped
• None
• Range
• Average MPG
• Menu Icon (Default Setting)
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Transmission Temperature
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Right Side — If Equipped
• None
• Range (Default Setting)
• Average MPG
• Menu Icon
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Transmission Temperature
• Oil Life
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Left — If Equipped
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake
• Oil Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Battery Voltage (Default Setting)
• Transmission Temperature
• Oil Life
• Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
• Turbo Boost — If Equipped
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
3
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lower Right — If Equipped
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average MPG
• Current MPG
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake
• Oil Pressure (Default Setting)
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Battery Voltage
• Transmission Temperature
• Oil Life
• Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
• Turbo Boost — If Equipped
• Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Restore Defaults
• Cancel (Default Setting)
• Ok
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and recall addi-
tional features when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the up and down button until Commercial
Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and enter the
Commercial Settings submenu.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the following
features:
• PTO — If Equipped
• Remote Ignition
• Idle Control
• Backup Alarm
• Commercial ParkSense — If Equipped
• Aux Switches
• PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an autho-
rized dealer to have the PIN reset.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the
vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load
reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time
and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power
to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It
will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to
the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical
supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of
charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that
the charging system cannot sustain.
3
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction.
The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a
problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and
vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction:
• Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are
larger than the capability of charging system. The charging
system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC
to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded
power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-
ping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12V
portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
•Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
•Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports.
•Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
•Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (addi-
tional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems,
alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message
is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation
of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify
the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indic-
ative and precautionary and as such must not be considered
as exhaustive. Always refer to the information in this chapter
in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not
appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
3
180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the
air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In
this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the
ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in
the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A
leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake
fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a spec-
ified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle
should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied
with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is ajar/
open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator
will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the tempera-
ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever
comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
3
182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil
pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle,
shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an autho-
rized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either
stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are
pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the
EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake has
been disconnected.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmis-
sion fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the trans-
mission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Warning Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is detected with the air
suspension system.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
(MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control
systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle
will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability
Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC
is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
— Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level
is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In
these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-
nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning
and service is required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
3
188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate when a rear
axle locker fault has been detected.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in "Safety" for
further information.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD
system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means
that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest
service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed
Control System is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway bar
disconnect system.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
— Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the
maximum payload may have been exceeded or load leveling
cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection
Mode will automatically be selected in order to “protect” the
air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited
due to payload.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
— TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/HAUL mode
is selected.
— Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cargo light is
activated by pushing the cargo light button on the headlight
switch.
— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front sway bar
is disconnected.
— Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when Snowplow Mode
has been activated.
/ — Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Alternate Trailer Height setting.
/ — Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the Bed Lowering Mode
procedure is complete.
/ — Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is
changing to a higher ride height.
/ — Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is
changing to a lower ride height.
— Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have
been locked. The telltale will display the lock icon on the
front and rear axles to indicate the current lock status.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been acti-
vated.
3
190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— 4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear drivesh-
afts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a
greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on
four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
— 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive HIGH mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power transfer case
is in the NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is
detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target
Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is
SET and there is no target vehicle detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in
"Starting And Operating" for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights
are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal
indicator will flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti-
vated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
• If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the side of the
activated turn signal will also illuminate to provide addi-
tional light when turning.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is
set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on but not
set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
3
192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is
ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in
the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then
20 mph (32 km/h). If these conditions are not met while
attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push
the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will
soon occur. Immediate service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure
to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect
equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to
read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored
in your vehicle systems, including personal infor-
mation.
3
194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test
over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the
ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off position
or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an autho-
rized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that
the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle oper-
ation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to
the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
195
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one
or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment
that may be susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equip-
ment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
4
196 SAFETY
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake
Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 197
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure
to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not func-
tioning properly and that immediate service is required. If
the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capa-
bility during emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
4
198 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not
apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill
as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing
uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK
or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
mission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
SAFETY 199
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight
forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn
to the left.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the
trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with
the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake
pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a
hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake or apply more
vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
4
200 SAFETY
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an addi-
tional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its
previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), func-
tions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the
wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle
is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
power to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of
the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appro-
priate for the steering wheel position.
SAFETY 201
(Continued)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi-
tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the perfor-
mance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance.
Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effective-
ness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
202 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alter-
nate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as
noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows
for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may
be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illumi-
nate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary
button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary
button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
SAFETY 203
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message
will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When
the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
4
204 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni-
tion is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with
the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by moni-
toring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the
steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance
that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
SAFETY 205
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
4
206 SAFETY
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle
speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using
the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
SAFETY 207
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC
exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
4
208 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch
has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess
speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar-based sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcy-
cles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
SAFETY 209
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward
gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly
approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience
drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning
Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors are located,
must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination
so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the taillights with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance due to contami-
nation or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a
blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view
mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain illu-
minated until blockage clearing conditions are met. First
4
210 SAFETY
clear the taillights around the sensors of the blockage. After
removing the blockage, the following procedure can be used
to reset the system:
• Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the igni-
tion and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection
zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the
outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime)
alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of
Operation” in this section for further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side
of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
SAFETY 211
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind
spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehi-
cles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will
not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
4
212 SAFETY
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is normal opera-
tion and your vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
SAFETY 213
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are trav-
eling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly
and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of
the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect
objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not
designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if
your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check
your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your
turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
4
214 SAFETY
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured
by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked
by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to
alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is
alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including
reducing the radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert
is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on
that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
SAFETY 215
present on the same side at the same time, both the visual
and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system,
the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is
also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP
state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or
audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when
the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the
previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
4
216 SAFETY
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — If
Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the
driver with audible, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a haptic warning in the form
of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calcu-
late the probability of a forward collision. When the system
determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warnings as well as
a possible haptic warning in the form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of
active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that the driver
intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and
provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will
be deactivated.
SAFETY 217
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal
FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse
of the system, after four Active Braking events within a
key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deac-
tivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deac-
tivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surround-
ings.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead
objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the
vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming
traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of
speed.
• “FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” in the Owner's Manual for further information.
• To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system on.
• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system off.
NOTE:
• When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.
• When the FCW is “off” prevents the system from warning
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.
If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
4
218 SAFETY
• When FCW status is set to “Only Warning” prevents the
system from providing limited active braking, or addi-
tional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
• When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking” this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings
and it applies autonomous braking.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver
after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status are program-
mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual for further
information.
• Far
•When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far” setting
and the system status is “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible more
distant collisions with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
• More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warn-
ings may prefer this setting.
• Medium
•When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
• Near
•When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near” setting
and the system status is “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible closer
collisions with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings.
•This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far”
and “Medium” settings, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
•More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
SAFETY 219
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited Func-
tionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system will return to
its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
4
220 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a TPMS
message, when this occurs you must increase the tire pres-
sure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pres-
sure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until
the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS
Warning Light off.
SAFETY 221
(Continued)
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approx-
imately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill Alert
feature the TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
222 SAFETY
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and
the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitor Display
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure
in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages, which
display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different color. An
"Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.
SAFETY 223
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value
as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automat-
ically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indi-
cate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
4
224 SAFETY
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains mate-
rials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPM sensor
location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an
incorrect TPM sensor location, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure
Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the tire pres-
sure display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will no longer flash and the tire pres-
sure display screen will be displayed showing the tire
pressure values the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the pressure in the non matching full size spare or
compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light and a “LOW TIRE”
message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addi-
tion, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display
a pressure value in a different color and an “Inflate to XX”
message.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addi-
tion, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
SAFETY 225
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and rein-
stall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching full size
spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and
the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS)
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS) is a
feature that will display the trailer tire pressure values and
warn the driver of a low trailer tire pressure, based on the
drivers set target tire pressure value, through the Instrument
Cluster (IC).
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and warns the
driver, through the IC, when either a low tire pressure condi-
tion or a TPM sensor or system malfunction condition exists.
The IC will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for each
of the trailer tires in the correct trailer position, based on
trailer configuration.
The TTPMS consist of the following components:
• Trailer Receiver Module
• Trailer Interface Module
• Two to twelve tire pressure monitoring sensors depending
on trailer configuration
The TTPMS is configured though the trailer settings menu in
the Uconnect system by selecting the desired trailer number
(up to four trailers can be configured), the number of axles (1
- 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set
trailer tire pressure. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
4
226 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active road
tires is detected a chime will sound. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color. An “Inflate to XXX” message will also be
displayed.
NOTE:
"XXX" = TPM trailer tire target pressure value programmed
by the customer
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
customer programmed target tire pressure value as shown in
the “Inflate to XXX” message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
it’s original color. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TTPMS to receive the updated information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the system fault will sound a
chime and the instrument cluster will display a “Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required” message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire Pressure
System Service Required" message will no longer be
displayed and the dashes will be replaced by pressure
values. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS
to receive the updated information.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” message
will be displayed in the Instrument Cluster when a trailer
number is selected that does not have configuration values
entered for the (Number of Tires, Number of Axles, SET
Target Tire Pressure, trailer TPM sensor ID's).
To correct this condition the (Number of Tires, Number of
Axles, and SET Target Tire Pressure) values must be entered
in the radio for the trailer number selected. The trailer
sensors must also be paired to the trailer. Refer to the “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
SAFETY 227
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Trailer”
message will be displayed in the Instrument Cluster when
the trailer sensors being received by the TTPM module do
match the trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number
selected. This message will be displayed when the sensors
being received completely match the sensors paired to
another trailer number configured in the TTPM module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number must be
selected in the radio. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire pressure
is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the
radio.
NOTE:
• Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire Fill
Alert system.
• The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an existing
TPM system fault is set to “active” or if the system is in
deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the TPM receiver module
detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire Fill
Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
• The horn will chirp to let the user know when to stop
filling the tire, when it reaches recommended pressure.
• The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled and
will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
4
228 SAFETY
• The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let out
to reach proper inflation level.
• The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
under-inflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA)
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional
feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert
system. The system is designed to allow the customer to
select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and
rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the customer
while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert customer settings menu in the
radio, the customer will be able to select a pressure setting
for both the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling
through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi incre-
ments for each axle setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard
pressure values for the front and rear axles as shown on the
vehicle placard pressure label.
The customer may also store the pressure values chosen for
each axle in the radio as a preset pressure. The customer will
be allowed to store up to two sets of preset values in the radio
for the front and rear axle pressure values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for the front and
rear axles that they want to inflate or deflate to, they can
begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPM receiver module
detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
• The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is
reached to let the user know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
• The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over inflated or
over deflated and will continue to chirp every five seconds
if the user continues to inflate or deflate the tire.
• The horn will chirp once again when enough air is added
or removed to reach proper selected pressure level.
SAFETY 229
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series
Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Informa-
tion System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to
the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure
in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the
proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications)
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
• Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applica-
tions) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains mate-
rials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
4
230 SAFETY
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk
of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt
properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
SAFETY 231
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to
inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the
“Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far
away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
4
232 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and
the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once
the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled
again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is prop-
erly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and Crew Cab
front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder
belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much
greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You
can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen-
gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
4
234 SAFETY
(Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,
should always wear their seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another
in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong
hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an autho-
rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
SAFETY 235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat,
and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your
lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the
seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat
belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
236 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
SAFETY 237
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it
up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
4
238 SAFETY
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
(Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is
folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats
when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from
its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the
vehicle is stationary.
SAFETY 239
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
4
240 SAFETY
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the
latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate into its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly
connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant,
the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint
and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
SAFETY 241
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions — If
Equipped
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and Crew Cab
front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." To
lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the
lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in the
seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the
webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder
belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing
seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat
Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s
body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
is not long enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt
Extender when not needed.
4
242 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant
women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is
reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with preten-
sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the
seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt place-
ment by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly
and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
SAFETY 243
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) — If
Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a "click."
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
4
244 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that
has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the
entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to
retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any
other seat belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
SAFETY 245
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a colli-
sion. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System Compo-
nents:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
OFF position or in the ACC position, the air
bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instru-
ment panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to
alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
4
246 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag
system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges
are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as
a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
SAFETY 247
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
2500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat
of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
4
248 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
3500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on
the instrument panel or steering wheel because any
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or
attempt to open them manually. You may damage the
air bags and you could be injured because the air bags
may no longer be functional. The protective covers for
the air bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe
injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat
belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
SAFETY 249
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection
by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good
indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from
an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas
is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way
as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front
air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver
and front passenger, and position the front occupants for
improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
4
250 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc-
tion potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
SAFETY 251
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are
located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between
you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.
4
252 SAFETY
(Continued)
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which could
alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle
for any reason.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 253
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type
of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air
Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children
must be properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
254 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with
electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/
or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy
and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns
or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna-
sium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like parti-
cles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process
that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or
throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with
SAFETY 255
cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If
you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be
in place to protect you.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on
the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention
of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also,
have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
4
256 SAFETY
(Continued)
• Cut off battery power to the:
•Engine
•Electric Motor (if equipped)
•Electric power steering
•Brake booster
•Electric park brake
•Automatic transmission gear selector
•Horn
•Front wiper
•Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition
switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instru-
ment panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
SAFETY 257
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If
it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
258 SAFETY
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times,
including babies and children. Every state in the United
States, and every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings
in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels
attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards.
You should also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/
parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-child-
safety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
SAFETY 259
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old
or who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in a
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have outgrown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
4
260 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so
they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child
seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint
in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,
do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
SAFETY 261
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-posi-
tioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly.
If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not
move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it
can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat posi-
tion. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall
the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
4
262 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between
the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi-
tion. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat
to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
SAFETY 263
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight
of the Child +
Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
4
264 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see
the following table for more information.
SAFETY 265
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
4
266 SAFETY
Mega Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
SAFETY 267
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No – Crew Full Bench
N/A – Mega / Crew Split Bench
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full
bench rear seat: use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega
Cab: Child restraints can be installed using
the supplied lower anchorages for the center
seating position.
4
268 SAFETY
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every
rear seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. Refer to
“Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
SAFETY 269
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found
at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-
back. They are just visible when you lean into the
rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap between the seat-
back and seat cushion.
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages
behind the front center and right seats. Mega Cab
and Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
4
270 SAFETY
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint
In Raised Position
SAFETY 271
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear Seat:
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not
use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center posi-
tion blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved
for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
4
272 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that
seating position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top
tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than
one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical
installation instructions.
SAFETY 273
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat
Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and acci-
dentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installa-
tion, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
4
274 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types
of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to
the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant
Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. The
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the
seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 275
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latchplate = Cinching Latchplate
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
276 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward
facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if
the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The head restraints can be removed in
every rear seating position if they
interfere with the installation of the
child restraint. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be
twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist
the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
SAFETY 277
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
1. For Mega and Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rear-
ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep
the child as far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to
pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against
the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back
into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
4
278 SAFETY
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked,
you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate
(CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rear-
ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
around the child restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
SAFETY 279
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt
path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble
tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up
to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the
buckle with the release button facing out, away from the
child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the
installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap
of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is
approved for that seating position, located behind the
top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System”
for the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
4
280 SAFETY
Regular and Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located
behind the center and right passenger seats. In the mega cab
truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear
seating position. There is a plastic cover over each
anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts under-
neath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head
restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap
underneath the head restraint and between its posts.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
SAFETY 281
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the
square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether
strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear
seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of
the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
4
282 SAFETY
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind
the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat
and over to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
SAFETY 283
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and right)
seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both child seats
should be connected to the center tether strap loop. This is
the correct way to tether two outboard child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
4
284 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind
the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat
and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And At-
tached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
SAFETY 285
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route
the tether straps following the directions for right and left
seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do
not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center seating
position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and left
tether straps before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make
sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening
between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
4
286 SAFETY
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear
doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls
to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at
high speed.
SAFETY 287
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor
condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have an autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer
for service if your defroster is inoperable.
4
288 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on
a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat
interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING! (Continued)
SAFETY 289
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and
cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check
the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the
driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the posi-
tion of the floor mat and may cause interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed,
always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the
floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with
the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install
the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to
clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by
lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
290
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will
protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles
in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
NOTE:
• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift
out of PARK.
• If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park
Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in “In Case
Of Emergency”.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch briefly
to the START position and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run and will automatically disengage when the
engine is running.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger compart-
ment.
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP Button
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If
the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage auto-
matically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the
engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained
without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed
below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the igni-
tion will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. See
AutoPark section for further details.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Posi-
tion)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To
change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and
use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the
ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed Transmission
Only
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle
in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your
vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking)
“P” is indicated in the Instrument Cluster Display and
near the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed
to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is
a back up system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off
and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After
30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically,
unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the
instrument cluster, causing the “AutoPark Engaged Shift to
P then Shift to Gear” to not be seen. In these cases, the shifter
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLYwhen vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed
is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when all of
these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue
until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the "P" in the Instrument Cluster
Display and near the shifter. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with
the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the
engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held to
the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine
for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a stan-
dard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by
the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not in
use for the winter months. During winter months, remove
the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour
to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thou-
sand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered
a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake
is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake,
firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is
placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended children in
a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a
collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis-
sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop
before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis-
sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,
before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmis-
sion in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear
selector located on the instrument panel. The transmission
gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear selector
and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake pedal to
shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past
multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE),
simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
CAUTION!
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position
and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects
PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the proper posi-
tion, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be
made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit
in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “Electronic
Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further
information. Some models will display both the selected gear
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially
important when the engine is cold.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmis-
sion into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is
in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it
is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis-
sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop
before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis-
sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,
before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify
that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will
not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a
location accessible to children), and do not leave the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine may
stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious
conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the
transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown,
perform this procedure only in a desired location (prefer-
ably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation — Eight-Speed
Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmis-
sion is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission
gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift
above fourth gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but
will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting
between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch (on
the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR- or
GEAR+ switch will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+ switch
until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument
cluster.
1 — GEAR + Switch 2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the poten-
tial for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive
shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at
engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch
must be pushed each time the engine is started.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
System. This system is designed to address exhaust and
engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator,
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle
and during drive.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking
can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to
swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control,
which may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manu-
ally shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer
case. Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer
case, located in this section for further information.
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the
4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides torque
to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel drive) which
allows front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed. This
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque (increased
torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this section for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads).
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive shaft
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop
before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis-
sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,
before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD HIGH
and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center of
the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint
pen or similar object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is
to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the
current and desired transfer case selection. When you select
a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do
the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the neces-
sary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position
have been met. To retry the selection, push the current posi-
tion, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift
requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your
transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift
four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that
service is required.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline
components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD
HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take care not to over-
speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drive-
train.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do
not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.
The position indicator light for the previous position will
remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash until all the requirements for the
selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position
have been met, the current position indicator light will
turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is
complete, the position indicator light for the selected posi-
tion will stop flashing and remain ON.
2WD To 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to shift
the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD HIGH can be
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle
in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
switch must be in the ON position with the engine either
running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition
switch is in the ACC position.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering down the
vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is illuminated.
Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
roll which may cause personal injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are spin-
ning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indi-
cator light will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spin-
ning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may
be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the
vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Proce-
dure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the
desired position indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is ON, until all
requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position
for normal street and highway conditions such as dry, hard
surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L posi-
tions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the gear
selector to the desired positions once the appropriate speed
and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting Procedure
– Manually Shifted Transfer Case” in this section for further
information.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no
light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline
components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do
not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced
due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, exces-
sive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4H)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Neutral (N)
Neutral — This range disengages the front and rear drivesh-
afts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be
made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing
the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer
case lever.
2H Or 4H To 4L
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be
heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the
vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is coasting at
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly
to the desired position. Do not pause in transfer case
NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission may require shutting the
engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift.
If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL,
hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine OFF.
Complete the range shift to the desired mode.
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to
the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on
dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting
to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the transmis-
sion is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is
fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Description
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the
truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable heights
that can be chosen based on your operating conditions.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN posi-
tion or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for all
user requested changes and load leveling.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position
of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 in (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used as
required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust to
maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension system
will load level (lower/exhaust only) once after 12 minutes
after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy removal of
a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck by main-
taining the ride height. After 12 minutes you will need to
turn the ignition to the run position for the air suspension to
re-level due to addition/removal of load in the vehicle. If the
air suspension system is disabled using the settings menu
(Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment Mode, or Bed
Lowering Mode) the system will remain disabled when the
vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can be
accomplished via the settings menu or driving the vehicle
above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode or Alignment
Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for Transport Mode and Bed
Lowering Mode.
NOTE:
• Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) when unloaded.
• Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Ignition OFF Behavior
For a predetermined amount of time after the ignition is off the
air suspension may adjust to maintain a proper appearance.
Air Suspension Modes
The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect the
system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system has a
feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. This
mode is intended to be enabled with engine running. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” if equipped
with a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume
of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or
damage to the system, see your authorized dealer for
service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the air
suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle
below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the automatic
load leveling system. This mode is intended to be enabled
with engine running. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if
equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” if equipped with a touch screen radio for
further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.
Bed Lowering Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the air
suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle
below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the automatic
load leveling system. This mode is intended to be enabled
with engine running. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if
equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension over-
loaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automat-
ically resume as soon as system operation requirements are
met. See your authorized dealer if system does not resume.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has
been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal oper-
ation does not resume.
Operation
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once
while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower the vehicle
to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
LED.
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the LED will
turn on.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride Height
(NRH) has been achieved and the LED will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated.
Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle, or dese-
lecting the mode via the interface.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated.
Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle, or by
deselecting the mode via the interface.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the interface.
• Bed Lowering Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the interface.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels
to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to maintain
its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck. The
locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
(Continued)
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one
wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground. It is not
recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials
locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and
speed limitations.
Axle Lock Selector
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions:
• AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are unlocked
• REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
• FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are locked
Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left
in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position, the
limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque
biasing capability for moderate low traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light will
flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command has
been successfully executed, the light will remain on solid.
CAUTION!
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are
locked on hard surfaced roads.
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and
the tires are spinning. You can damage drivetrain
components. Lock the rear axle before attempting situ-
ations or navigating terrain, which could possibly
cause the vehicle to become stuck.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to “Four
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Push the REAR LOCK button while
traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The RR indicator light
will remain on when the rear axle is locked.
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to
allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is flashing
after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/
REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose
gravel to expedite the locking action.
To lock the front axle; push the FRONT/REAR LOCK button
while traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The indicator light
will be solid when the front axle is locked.
NOTE:
The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock.
To unlock the front axle; push the REAR LOCK button. The
FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the
axle is unlocked.
NOTE:
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side
loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the steering
wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in
REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the
torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle; push the AXLE UNLOCK button.
The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear
axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
suspension travel in off-road situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an increased
ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in the front
and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major advantage to
increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on
approach/departure and break over angles.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving. A
locked front axle is intended for off-road driving only.
Locking the front axle during on-road driving will
reduce the steering ability. This could cause a collision
and you may be seriously injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar
switch located below the instrument panel.
Sway Bar Disconnect Button
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push the
switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar Indi-
cator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illumi-
nate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash during activation transition, or when activa-
tion conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should
remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or
4LO and push the SWAY BAR button to obtain the Off-Road
position. Refer to “Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has
been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and
right suspension height differences. This condition is due to
driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for
the Stabilizer/Sway Bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard
surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h), you
may lose control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar enhances
vehicle stability and assists in maintaining control of the
vehicle. The system monitors vehicle speed and will
attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing off road
light and solid on road light. Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will
attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or
rocked from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode; push the SWAY BAR button
again.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON ONLY
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities. These
off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilder-
ness trails where few travel, providing a source of exciting
and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out, you
should contact your local governmental agency to determine
the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation
areas. You should always tread lightly and only use estab-
lished roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,
or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of
information and usually have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of
the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering
damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed
cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protection
allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road situations
that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you can
drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp
without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This distance
up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and
multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of 510,
which means you can articulate one front wheel 26 inches (66
cm) in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact
with the ground.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or death.
Contact your local service center for assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability to cross a
body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain are
safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/
h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and
ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is
one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep
a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or
braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted speed
limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what isn't. When on
a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obsta-
cles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future
driving route while remembering what you are currently
driving over.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may
intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for addi-
tional traction or to improve handling and control on slip-
pery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low range
will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range.
This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills,
with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4LO (Low
Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy loads
rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI (High Range)
traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow,
mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to steering,
acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you should accel-
erate slowly, leave greater stopping distances and avoid
abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow constant
steady pace. The key is to maintain the vehicle's momentum.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and trac-
tion at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear
and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low Range) if necessary.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly
back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow
the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your
momentum.
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around
the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should
use 4LO (Low Range) with a gear low enough to maintain
your momentum without shifting. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼
turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud
holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and
getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine braking
may cause skidding and loss of control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it
is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can
be safely recovered if stuck.
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full
tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pres-
sure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and
maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to
be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your
tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for
a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will dras-
tically improve your traction and handling, while driving
on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up
prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of
obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to deter-
mine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the
steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then
inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object.
Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure
and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can
be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obsta-
cles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or
around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in
front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires
and undercarriage, and guide you through.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of your
vehicle.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures
you drive over the largest with your tires. This will lift your
undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is
tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to
take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to
cross the large rocks with your tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle's
mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and
let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You
need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep
sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep
sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a
rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the
right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just
created. You should now be able to drive out following the
trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10
to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the
log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spin-
ning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle
off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to
strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than
the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become
high centered.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up
on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best
direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks
under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when
you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle
or winching the vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills
can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb
and should not be attempted. You should always feel confi-
dent with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always
climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a
hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep.
Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the
trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other
side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on
the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something
goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confi-
dent, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the
transfer case into 4LO (Low) and proceed with caution.
You should use first gear and 4LO (Low Range) for very
steep hills.
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your ability
to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line
your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate
with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as
you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep
grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose
control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the
throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground.
As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle
and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill you
need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What
is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a
slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a
straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of
the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make
sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the transmission in
first gear (manually select first gear on automatic transmis-
sions) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more
weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the possi-
bilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure the
surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If
possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly
up or down.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or
begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow
your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the
brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back
slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of
the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed. If
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases the
risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities
and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep
water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If
the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it
has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and
slow. You want to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and
proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph
[5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differ-
entials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs
of water ingestion.
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you approach
any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it
safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk
through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be
sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom
condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters, check for
hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on
any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary.
The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn
around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the
vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes.
Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too
fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle
components and your brakes will be less effective once
wet and/or muddy.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and the
ability to safely cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing
Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types
normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to
determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes
for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able
to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low
and slow method.
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control. Even in very
shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from
around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage
with slower water currents in depths greater than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never
attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current
can push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if the
water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the
vehicle's body. Before you proceed determine the speed of the
current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your ride
comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air pressure
allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its surface area
for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground
contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require
different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and heavier
vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
or drowning.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to experiment to
determine what is right for your situation. It is easier and
faster to let air out than it is to replace it so, start high and
lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway
conditions. Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their
normal on road air pressure.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where
you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery
should always be given consideration before attempting a
questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driving
without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation.
Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most
situations. The first thing to do is assess the situation. Why
are you stuck? Are you hung up on something? Would it be
easier to go forward or to go backward? Can you still move
the vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there high
risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine the best
method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly
and the only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your
vehicle would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impinge-
ment on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is
severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to
be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on some-
thing you should jack the vehicle up and stack something
under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object
without causing further damage. This should be tried before
attempting any recovery method.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clearing
the object, may result in additional underbody damage.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is
one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used
methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle from
DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after each
shift. During this process, for additional traction, try
turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no more
than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or snow try
spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris
from the tread and improve the traction. You want to
create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build
vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you out.
Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and
after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not
free, stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous
rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your
vehicle and the environment.
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is
not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to
take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery.
Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as
an attachment point. Using tow straps requires coordina-
tion between the two drivers. Good communication and
line of sight are required for a safe recovery. First connect
the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehi-
cles. There should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters)
between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If neces-
sary join two tow straps together using a 1 ½ inch hard
wood dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming
knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap
breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to
three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle,
using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap
providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The
vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery, at
the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the
same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle
becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle
should signal they are free and should hit their brakes
stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle
should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once
signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important to
avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Additional
Information) – Winching is most commonly used in the
following situations: there is no support vehicle available,
a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle,
there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or
where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver a
high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows
you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow
controlled manner. This control works well for avoiding
further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use
the winch look for a good anchor point. It needs to be
strong enough to hold more than the vehicle's weight and
provide a direction of pull as straight as possible. Use
block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull
or increase the winch's pulling force. If the anchor point is
a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the
strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in
PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot find an
anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by
burying it. Once you have determined an anchor point
hook up the cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of
cable left on the drum, and place a floor mat or something
else over the strung out cable. Placing something over the
strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it
breaks. Next, place the vehicle in first gear and apply a
very light throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful
not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle.
Do not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to
bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (.6 to
1 meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this greatly
increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage. Always
keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away from a
strapping or winching situation.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while
winching. Failure to follow these instructions can result
in serious or fatal injury.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check
tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust
system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension.
Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values spec-
ified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted
material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance
and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs simi-
larly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during slip-
pery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery
surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel
on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary appli-
cation of the parking brake may be necessary to gain
maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide side-
ways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
EQUIPPED)
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle
charging system to power a motor that winds the winch rope
onto the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By
nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces and
should be used with care. Do not operate the winch without
reading and understanding the complete winch owner's
manual.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground
since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lbs (454 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops
to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for 30
seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is tripped,
the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes
to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before
continuing to winch.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required to
tension the winch rope.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
Winch Components
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will be located
on the bumper assembly) allows the remote control to be
attached to the control pack to allow the winch to func-
tion.
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the rope to be stored on the winch and transmits
force to the rope. The winch is equipped with an integral
brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the
winch motor is stopped.
4. Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the winch to
be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force. This
synthetic rope is highly flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
5. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to
be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the rope
to be pulled from the winch by hand.
6. Remote Control: The remote control provides the inter-
face between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch in,
out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle
switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is
left in the neutral (center) position.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the synthetic
rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
(Continued)
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch
to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear protective
gloves while operating the winch or handling the
winch rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything
that could become entangled in the rope and other moving
parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch's pulling power; and (2) change
your pulling direction without damaging the winch rope.
Proper use of the snatch block is covered in "Before You
Pull."
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe means
of connecting the looped ends of cables, straps and
snatch blocks. The shackle's pin is threaded to allow
easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of tough,
high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an
attachment point for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and objects, as well as protect living
trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided with the
synthetic rope and must be used with the synthetic rope at all
times to protect the rope from potential abrasion wear. The
sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily be positioned along the
synthetic rope to protect from rough surfaces and sharp
corners.
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when
spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
• Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated capacity.
• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the
synthetic rope.
• Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
• Always take your time when using a winch.
• Use the right equipment for the situation.
• Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the synthetic
rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
• Only the operator should handle the synthetic rope and
remote control.
• Think safety at all times.
• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, synthetic rope is in tension, or rope drum is
moving.
• Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the synthetic
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation and
when spooling.
• Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Always use
a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk protector
on the anchor.
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap
attached directly to the winch hook.
• Never use bungee or kinetic straps that develop
tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of
force when stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.
• Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
synthetic rope around the winch drum.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always pass remote control through a window to avoid
pinching lead in door, when using remote inside a
vehicle.
• Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch
while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
WARNING! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
(Continued)
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and synthetic rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear, frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
CAUTION!
• Always know your winch: Take the time to fully read
and understand the included Installation and Opera-
tions Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques,
in order to understand your winch and the winching
operation.
• Always inspect winch installation and synthetic rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed, kinked
or damaged rope must be replaced immediately. Loose
or damaged winch installation must be corrected
immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating
winching.
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
synthetic rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar through the
rollers. Watch and listen to winch for proper snugness.
• Never power hook through fairlead. Could cause
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch
drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage.
Freespooling conserves battery power.
Free Spool Lever
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the
winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap
to the hook (if not attached).
Hook Strap
WARNING!
• Never touch winch rope or hook while someone else is
at the control switch or during winching operation.
• Never touch winch rope or hook while under tension or
under load.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. To prevent losing the
end, hold the hook strap while you work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is critical to
winching operations. An anchor must be strong enough to
hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, stumps
and rocks. Hook the cable as low as possible. If no natural
anchors are available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be sure to put
the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and
block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving.
Ideally, you'll want an anchor point that will enable you to
pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move. This
allows the synthetic rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the
spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as possible will
provide the winch with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook, being careful not to over tighten
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located on the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the remote
control switch, slowly wind the rope until no slack
remains. Once the rope is under tension, stand well clear
of it and never step over it.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be neatly wound
around the spooling drum. Improper winding can cause
damage to the synthetic rope.
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling
Drum
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over the rope. A heavy blanket
can absorb energy should the synthetic rope break. Place
it on the rope midway between the winch and the anchor
point. Do this before the rope is put under tension. Do not
approach or move the blanket once tension is applied. Do
not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is necessary
to move or remove the blanket, slack the tension on the
rope first.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions clear.
Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely aware
of your intentions before you pull. Declare where the
spectators should not stand - never behind or in front of
the vehicle and never near the synthetic rope or snatch
block. Your situation may have other "no people" zones.
No People Zones
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on
and light tension already on the synthetic rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the rope is
winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be
slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue
pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are
able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is
complete.
Using The Remote Control
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
•What to look for under load: The synthetic rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the synthetic rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer rope wraps from
drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging
the synthetic rope. Avoid shock loads by using the
control switch intermittently to take up rope slack.
Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and
synthetic rope ratings. During side pulls the synthetic
rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum. This
stack can become large enough to cause serious
damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as straight ahead
as possible and stop winching if the synthetic rope
comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an
uneven stack, spool out that section of the rope and
reposition it to the opposite end of the drum, which will
free up space for continued winching.
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is complete,
be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes and shift the trans-
mission to PARK. Release tension in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person handling the
synthetic rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide
through the hand, control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote control
lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange the
synthetic rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be
sure any synthetic rope already on the spooling drum is
wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten
the layer if necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light
tension and spool the rope back and onto the winch drum in
even layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the
layers as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook
is the same distance as the full length of the remote control
from the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and
forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the
synthetic rope. Walk the synthetic rope towards the fairlead,
carefully spooling in the remaining rope. By pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the hawse
fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean and
dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put
the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected, clean, dry
area.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of other
winching techniques. These could range from too little
distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line
rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a
straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what
technique is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all
times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line from the
winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
synthetic rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging synthetic rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will
enable you to change your pulling direction while still
allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto
the spooling drum.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advan-
tage and that increases your pulling power.
Double Line
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers
of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch
block to double line out more rope. This decreases the
number of layers of synthetic rope on the drum, and
increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
synthetic rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to
your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through a
snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch
block, pull out enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to
the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain.
Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends
of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full function-
ality after a battery disconnect.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed
control functions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control On/Off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
1 — On/Off Button 3 — SET (-)
2 — RES (+) 4 — CANCEL
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
To Activate
Push the On/Off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the On/Off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal
is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the On/Off button, or returning the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving conve-
nience provided by cruise control while traveling on high-
ways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control func-
tion performs differently. Please refer to the proper section
within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply
limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set
speed) automatically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go
too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appro-
priate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at
a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always
confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system.
It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,
traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance
to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake oper-
ation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately two seconds in the stop position. At
this point, there will be an “ACC may cancel soon”
chime and warning to the driver. When ACC is
cancelled, the system will release the brakes and the
driver must take over braking. The system can be
resumed when the target vehicle drives off by
releasing the brake and pushing the resume button
on the steering wheel.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button
2 — Distance Button
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open at low speed.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system
will turn off and the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (-)
button and release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after the ACC
has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System
(ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (+) button and
then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instru-
ment cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, the driver will have to push the RES (+) button to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road
conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or
too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for
safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing
the RES (+) button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing
the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When you override and push the RES (+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will auto-
matically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when
following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a
target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver
will either have to push the RES (+) button, or apply the
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill
and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calcu-
lates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
The system automatically defaults to the longest distance
setting. To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar. Once the shortest
setting is reached, if the button is pushed again it will reset
to the default setting (longest).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the
set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC
Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if neces-
sary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system automatically
defaults to the longest setting (four bars). The setting can be
overridden by pushing the Distance Button on the steering
wheel.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This addi-
tional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the
left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, then ACC will
cancel and the driver must take over braking. When the
target vehicle drives off, ACC can be resumed by releasing
the brake and pushing the RES (+) button.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for
approximately two seconds, a chime will sound and an
“ACC may cancel soon” warning will display. The brakes
will release when ACC is cancelled and the driver must take
over braking.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in
the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not
been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or
ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
still available. For additional information refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction. The sensor is located in the camera in the center
of the windshield, on the forward side of the rearview
mirror.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear the wind-
shield.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could
cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a
sensor realignment.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer
present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise
Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reac-
tivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,
or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog on
the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster
display will show “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the back
side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruc-
tion, have the windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits
ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavail-
able. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following
an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.
In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The
driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
NOTE:
• Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift kits, and
brush/grille bars can hinder module performance. Ensure
the radar/camera has no obstructions in the field of view.
• Height modifications can limit module performance and
functionality.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/radar
field of view.
• Any modifications to the vehicle that may obstruct the
field of view of the radar/camera are not recommended.
Cleaning Instructions
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the cover and block the
camera lens. Clean the camera lens with a soft microfiber
cloth, being careful not to damage or scratch the module.
Towing A Trailer
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when
ACC is braking.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accel-
erate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability
reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is
out of the curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic condi-
tions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may
be limited.
ACC Hill Example
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehi-
cles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the
vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle
ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC on and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
off. Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the RES (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when
the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green
when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is dependant
on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant
on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System
(ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector posi-
tion, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.
When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear
sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone Fast Tone
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume is medium.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the vehicle graphic with “Off”
over the arcs for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will automatically disable when the
system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been
connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The
instrument cluster display will show an “Off” message over
the arcs if the ParkSense system is off, or a “Trailer” message
if the system is on, for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is disabled
or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will show the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" or the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle
graphic will show in the instrument cluster display, along
with the display overlay “Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display overlay will
read “Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required” Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors" appears in the
instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an autho-
rized dealer.
If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" appears in
the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you move the gear selector into REVERSE with
ParkSense turned off, the instrument cluster display will
show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The Park-
Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
18 inches (45 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper while driving
the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misin-
terpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
"Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" message
to appear in the instrument cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be
disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open posi-
tion and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and/or
front fascia/bumper, and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this
section for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display when the vehicle is in REVERSE, indicating
the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear
sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is
in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone For Rear Only Fast Tone For Rear Only
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio
Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal
is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-
mable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume is medium.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front
ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “Off” message. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear Park-
Sense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show the "Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Service Required" or the "Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle graphic
will show in the instrument cluster display, along with the display
overlay “Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors.” If the
system needs service, the display overlay will read “Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required.” Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction,
and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized
dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position
and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs.
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The Park-
Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indi-
cation that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off
if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-
preting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required”
message to be appear in the instrument cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be
disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open posi-
tion. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the
"Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu. Whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be
displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or
Uconnect screen (if equipped). If the image is displayed in
the Uconnect screen, a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” will display across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting to another gear, unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-
tion, or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of the
Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through
the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, and the
vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is cycled to
the OFF position.
• The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is
not in REVERSE.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Equipped — Cargo Camera Icons:
• — Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
• — Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
• — AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to
indicate the current active Camera image being displayed is
made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to
switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made available
whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE
gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the backup
camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.
The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For further information about how to access and change the
programmable features of the ParkView Rear Backup
Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of the tailgate
handle.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the
camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a
soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to
the standard Backup Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will
display the standard Backup Camera view. If the vehicle is
then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom
View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are
at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
• If the vehicle in is DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom
View is unavailable and the icon will appear grey.
• While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUX Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX
Cameras, which display rearview and side view images from
the trailer on the touchscreen.
Activating AUX Camera
Backup Camera Only: The AUX Camera is activated by first
pressing the Backup Camera button on the touchscreen,
followed by the AUX button located in the upper left corner
of the rearview display. The AUX camera can also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing the AUX
button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch between
each camera by then pressing the AUX 1 or AUX 2 buttons
on the Trailer Camera display.
Backup And Cargo Camera:The AUX Camera is activated
by first pressing either the Backup Camera or Cargo Camera
button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button
located in the upper left corner of the rearview display.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch between
each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or AUX 2 buttons on the
Trailer Camera display.
Surround View Camera: The AUX Camera is activated by
first pressing the Cargo Camera button on the touchscreen,
followed by the AUX button located in the upper left corner
of the rearview display. The AUX Camera can also be acti-
vated by pressing the Backup Camera button or Surround
View Camera button on the touchscreen, followed by the
AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch between
each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or AUX 2 buttons on the
Trailer Camera display.
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the “X” in the
upper right corner of the touchscreen. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
• If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera is
connected, the touchscreen will display a blue screen along
with the message “Camera System Unavailable.” The
screen can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the upper
right hand corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
• Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera feature.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
• The display will always default to the Trailer Camera
display (AUX 1).
• The “X” button is not available when the vehicle is in
REVERSE unless it is acting as a back button within
camera views. The camera image must always be
displayed when the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View Camera
System that allows you to see an on-screen image of the surround-
ings and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or a different view is selected through the "on screen
soft buttons". The top view of the vehicle will show which doors are
open. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The
Surround View Camera System is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors.
NOTE:
• The Surround View Camera System has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera
view and top view is the default view of the system (Auto-
matic Activation).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position. There is a touch screen button (X) to disable the
display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited
and the last known screen appears again.
While the “rear view” is displayed, and if enabled, active
guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width
of the vehicle, including the side view mirrors and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Backup Camera view can be manually activated by
selecting “Backup Camera” through the Controls menu
within the Uconnect screen.
Refer to “Parkview Rear Back Up Camera” in this section for
more information on activation conditions.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with Rear
View and Front View in a split view display. There are inte-
grated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear of the
vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red corre-
sponding the distance zones to the oncoming object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View screen will be
changed based on the cameras present in the vehicle. If not
equipped with a Cargo Camera or Trailer Reverse Guidance,
the Backup Camera soft button will be displayed. If
equipped with a Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guid-
ance, the Cargo Camera soft button will be displayed, and if
equipped with both a Cargo Camera and Trailer Reverse
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Guidance, the Trailer Reverse Guidance soft button will be
displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which doors are open.
• Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE
and is always paired with the Top view of the
vehicle with optional active guide lines for the
projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the
driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system.
The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front view will show you what is immediately
in front of the vehicle and is always paired with the
Top view of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the
driver a wider angle view of the front camera
system. The Top view will be disabled when this
is selected.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will provide
a full screen rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Backup Camera view was selected through
the Surround View Screen, exiting out of the Rear View
Camera screen will return to the Surround View Screen. If
the Backup Camera was manually activated through the
Controls menu of the Uconnect display, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Cargo Camera
Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key will provide a
full screen view of the cargo area.
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the Rear
View Camera screen, exiting out of the Cargo Camera screen
will return to the Rear View Camera screen. If the Cargo
Camera was manually activated through the Controls menu
of the Uconnect display, exiting out of the display screen will
return to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance soft key
will provide a full screen view of the cargo area
and trailer.
NOTE:
If the Trailer Reverse Guidance was selected through the
Rear View Camera screen, exiting out of the Trailer Reverse
Guidance screen will return to the Rear View Camera screen.
If the Trailer Reverse Guidance was manually activated
through the Controls menu of the Uconnect display, exiting
out of the display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to
the standard Backup Camera display.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will
display the standard Backup Camera view. If the vehicle is
then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom
View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are
at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
• If the vehicle in is DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom
View is unavailable and the icon will appear grey.
• While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated automatically:
• When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/
h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position. There is a touch screen
button (X) to disable the display of the camera image.
• When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is
exited and the last known screen appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated manually from the Uconnect controls menu
via Surround View button or Backup Camera button:
• The "X" button on the display is pressed
• Vehicle is shifted into PARK
• Ignition is cycled to OFF
• Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera is activated manually, and the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation methods for
automatic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually through the
Uconnect settings menu. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see your
nearest authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the
Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of the
pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,
and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through the
Uconnect settings by pressing the Cargo Camera soft button,
followed by the “Dynamic Centerline” soft button on the
touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay
will display anytime the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button located in the
bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally or
vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the “Accept”
button to set the centerline to the newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be deacti-
vated whenever the Cargo Camera display is deactivated. It can
also be manually deactivated through the Uconnect settings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view image of
the road ahead, along with tire lines to guide the driver when
driving on narrow roads.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated by pressing the
Forward Camera soft button on the touchscreen.
Once activated, the camera image will remain on as long as
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the following
conditions:
• The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10
seconds.
• The “X” button on the display is pressed.
• Vehicle is shifted into PARK.
• Ignition is cycled to OFF.
NOTE:
The Forward Facing Camera cannot be deactivated when the
vehicle is in 4LO.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the driver in
backing up a trailer by providing adjustable camera views of
the trailer and surrounding area. The cameras are mounted
on the side mirrors and the images will be displayed
side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and right camera
images are swapped and mirrored on the touchscreen to
show the equivalent area behind the vehicle as though the
driver is using the side mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be activated by
pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance button on the touch-
screen.
Deactivation
Once activated, the image will continue to be displayed in
any gear until the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the
hook, located on the fuel filler door.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This
is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The
MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is
not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place gas containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system
could result from using an improper fuel tank filler
tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Always place container on the ground before filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
when you are filling it.
• Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the
instrument cluster telltale display area. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off the message.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The
label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area
so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs,
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability
does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the
actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all
loading conditions up to full GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of
the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle
may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limita-
tions are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor-
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The
total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result
if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the
load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction asso-
ciated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recog-
nizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the
most popular on the market today and they are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/
loading to comply with GAWR requirements.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and
trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do
not connect the trailer).
NOTE:
Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer Height
(ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine
running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling
of the air suspension system. It may not be possible to enter
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly loaded.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distri-
bution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that the
height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above
normal ride height [H1]).
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
dations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow
haul mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do
not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distri-
bution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that the
height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above
normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommen-
dations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow
haul mode engaged.
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in
the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer
with a coupling king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option.
Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety, care,
assembly, and operating instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which
attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The
coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear
axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a
given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should
be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for
your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) / 2000 lbs (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lbs (10,432 kg) / 2300 lbs (1043 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 2500 lbs (1,133 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lbs (13,607 kg) / 3000 lbs (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) / 2000 lbs (907 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 35,000 lbs (15,875 kg) / 3500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
towable for your given drivetrain.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight on
the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in
or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to
the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed
options or dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And
Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
(Continued)
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals.
When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not
make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload
your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of
control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis
structure or tires.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case
is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare
tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum
system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could
cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer
brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with electric
trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems. Some
previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is acti-
vated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded,
it should have its own brakes and they should be of
adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,
and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on when
braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal. Only the
trailer stop lamps will come on when the manual brake
control lever is applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting
for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light”
will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status Indi-
cator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to
a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environment
at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condi-
tion, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See
your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not recog-
nized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be avail-
able), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct
type of trailer must be selected from the instrument
cluster display options.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until
“TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing tires),
reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer
wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum
GAIN setting of 10.
* The suggested selection depends and may change
depending on the customer preferences for braking perfor-
mance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state
may also affect the selection.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument cluster
display. Display messages, along with a single chime, will be
displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket
module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but
you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the
following illustrations.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The trans-
mission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does
occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a
lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range
(using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating,
activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly areas, or
select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you
can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air Suspen-
sion System” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running position
while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspen-
sion system.
SNOWPLOW
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed
option. These packages include components necessary to
equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended
that the owner/installer obtain and follow the recommenda-
tions contained within the current Body Builders Guide. See
your authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manufacturer
for this information. There are unique electrical systems that
must be connected to properly assure operator safety and
prevent overloading vehicle systems.
Before Plowing
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above
ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision. Do
not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
lamps are not properly installed.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builders
Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should
not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR
should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options
or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system,
all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and
cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These
weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the driver's side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications
at the factory without consideration for the weight of the
plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if neces-
sary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season. This
will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface condi-
tions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The operator
should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow
adequate passing clearance.
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator should
be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce
speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar
areas or under poor visibility.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer's instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery termi-
nals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
damage, the following precautions should be observed.
• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small or
congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed
15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice
of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmis-
sion.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state
and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in
Transport mode before tying them down (from the body)
on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air Suspension – If
Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down
tension.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a
tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle
is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-
mission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to
secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to internal
parts.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must
be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Auto-
matic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recre-
ational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF
the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in
NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under
“Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission
damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
• The transmission must be placed in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will
leak from the transfer case, causing damage to internal
parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, with
the engine running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle
is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL:
•With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever into NEUTRAL (N)
•With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models have
a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will blink while the shift is in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed
and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmis-
sions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the
engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the ignition
to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode. Remove the
key fob from the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow
bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to
be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL
(N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button
is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be oper-
able. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator lights will be
on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine
should be started and left running for a minimum of 60
seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24
hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for temperature
effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected
to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
•With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever to the desired position.
•With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off.
After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift
to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button
selector switch, push and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position indi-
cator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N), turning
the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful to avoid
gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the
engine must remain running, since turning the engine OFF
will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission
must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-
matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal,
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing the
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be oper-
able. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift
will not take place and no position indicator lights will be
on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
(Continued)
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warn-
ings before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water
that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted
on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
under water and if there are any obstacles in the way
before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off-Road Driving Tips
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or
driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural obstacles
force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill, choose a
mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift to
low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly to
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to
your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect
your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle,
etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing
water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any
fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in
further damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it
to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check
tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust
system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension.
Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values spec-
ified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted
material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance
and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
5
440
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning switch is located on the upper
switch bank just below the radio.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch Uconnect display,
the Hazard Warning switch is located above the display.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used
when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is
disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear
down your battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 441
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
6
442 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian™.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle
issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a
ten second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to
a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the overhead console or press the cancel-
lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS
Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead
console.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS oper-
ator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS oper-
ator:
•Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
•The vehicle brand.
•The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 443
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call
system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be
able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to speak with you or
other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS
operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important
vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or
smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or loca-
tion), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency
Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable
network and GPS antennas. You could prevent oper-
able network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s elec-
trical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment
to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to
fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s
electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could
cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not there to
help protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
444 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected,
and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The overhead console light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message:
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to,
the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected
during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead console
light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your autho-
rized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control
system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 445
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer-
gency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
6
446 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs (Sheet 1 of 2)
Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 447
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Front Park And Turn — If Equipped
Low Beam
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) 194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Exterior Bulbs (Continued) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Bulb Number
6
448 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
shield and disengage the bulb access cover by rotating
counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connector
from the low beam bulb.
1 — Access Cover
2 — Fastener
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and
cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 449
(Continued)
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1/4 turn to unlock the
bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and
covers.
High Beam
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to find
the high beam bulb access cover.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage the access
cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connector
from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1/4 turn to unlock the
bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and
covers.
Front Park And Turn
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to find
the park and turn socket.
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and
cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
450 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Park And Turn Socket
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the park and
turn socket from the lamp by rotating counterclock-
wise ¼ turn.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and
covers.
Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
1 — Access Cover
2 — Fastener
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 451
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
shield and disengage the side marker socket by rotating
counterclockwise ¼ turn.
Side Marker Socket
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and
covers.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from
the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6
452 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws and push pins that pass through
the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough to
unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the
lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb
socket.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Fasteners
1 — Tail Lamp Housing
2 — Bulb Socket Locations
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 453
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With Cargo
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the
body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6
454 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring
harness to the body.
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
•Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 455
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
6
456 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.
Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to
the bulb sockets.
Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 457
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Equipped
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the
original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off and/
or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized
dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag
system, braking system), power unit systems (engine
system, transmission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
6
458 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description
of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped
on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black –
Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped (DS 1500
Only)
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F04 50 Amp Red 400W Inverter – If Equipped (HD Only)
F05
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red (Special
Services Vehicle (SSV))
– Compressor For Air Suspension – If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 459
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump Motor (DS 1500 Only)
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08
20 Amp Blue (DS 1500
LD/Cummins Diesel)
40 Amp Green
–
–
NOX Sensor – If Equipped
Aux Relay Output- SSV Only
F09
40 Amp Green (SSV &
Cummins Diesel)
–
Aux Relay Output / Diesel Fuel Heater – If
Equipped
F09 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped (HD Only)
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink –
PWR - Trailer Tow Electric Brake Batt Feed – If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F11 40 Amp Green –
Brake System Module (ECU and Valves) (HD
Only)
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting
F15
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
–
–
Power Side Steps – If Equipped (HD Only)
Extra Fuse - SSV Only
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch Control Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
460 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F19
20 Amp Blue (DS 1500
LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue –
Engine Control Module GPEC / Heavy Duty /
Other – If Equipped
F22
25 Amp White
(Cummins Diesel)
– PCM – If Equipped
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed # 1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink –
Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink –
Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module /
Valves – If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Separate
E-Brake)/Trailer Tow (BUX)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 461
F31 30 Amp Pink –
Diesel Heater Control – If Equipped (DS 1500
LD Diesel)
F31 20 Amp Blue – Aux App SSV Only - If Equipped
F32 – –
Aux Feed, Special Services Vehicle-If Equipped
(DS 1500 Only)
F33 20 Amp Blue –
Trans Control Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
Aux Feed, SSV Only (DS 1500 Only)
F34 30 Amp Pink –
Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If
Equipped (HD Only)
SSV (DS 1500 Only)
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink
–
Electric Back Light – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink –
Fuel Heater #2, Aux Relay 2 – If Equipped (HD
Only)
SSV (DS 1500 Only)
F38 30 Amp Pink –
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
(HD Only)
Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped (DS 1500
Only)
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – SSV Only
F40 – 10 Amp Red Ventilated Seats – If Equipped (HD Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
462 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F41 – 10 Amp Red
Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam – If
Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped (HD Only)
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red
Upfitters Relay Coil – If Equipped (HD Only)
Spare (DS 1500 Only)
F49 – 10 Amp Red
Instrument Panel Cluster / HVAC (DS 1500
Only)
Instrument Cluster / MOD CSG (HD Only)
F50
–
20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition Node
Module, Radio Frequency Hub Module /
Electric Steering Column Lock - If Equipped
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non Memory Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue
Additional Diesel Content - If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 463
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow
TCM/PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW (RFE
Trans Only) – If Equipped (HD Only)
Transmission (DS 1500 Only)
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting (LED) – If Equipped (HD Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue
Underhood Lamp / TCM – If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
F61 – 10 Amp Red
UREA Sensor / PM Sensor – If Equipped (DS
1500 LD Diesel & Cummins Diesel)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Coils (Gas), Ignition Coils Capacitors
(Gas) / Short Runner Valve Actuator / Urea
Heater Control Unit (DS 1500 LD Diesel) / RLY
Coil Feed-SCR (DS 1500 LD Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module /
SRV – If Equipped
F65 – 10 Amp Red
MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB
IP / WCPM – If Equipped (HD Only)
Spare (DS 1500 Only)
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Sunroof / Light and Rain Sensor Module /
Inside Rearview Mirror / Passenger Window
SW / USB Port Rear / Feed for R/A RLY #2
Coil – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
464 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F67 – 10 Amp Red
CD / DVD / UCI Port – If Equipped (HD Only)
Bluetooth Hands-Free Module / CD – If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR – If Equipped (HD Only)
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Module – If Equipped (HD Only)
F70 – 30 Amp Green
Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed
(Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F71 – 25 Amp Clear
Amplifier / Active Noise Cancelation – If
Equipped (HD Only)
F72 – 10 Amp Red
PCM / DC/DC Converter Voltage– If Equipped
(DS 1500 Only)
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow
Fuel Transfer Pump (Rear Tank) – If Equipped
(HD Only)
F74 – 20 Amp Yellow
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
(DS 1500 Only)
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm – If Equipped (HD Only)
F75 – 10 Amp Red
ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY– If Equipped
(HD Only)
Coolant Temperature Valve – If Equipped (DS
1500 Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 465
F76 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (HD Only)
Brake System Module / Stop Lamp Switch /
Electric Park Brake / Clutch Pedal Switch (DS
1500 Only)
F77 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle
Disconnect Module / TCM (HD Only)
Drivetrain Control Module / ELSD / Front Axle
Disconnect Module / Transmission Control
Relay / RDM / Power Take Off Unit – If
Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F78 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control
Module / Electric Power Steering (DS 1500
Only)
F78 – 15 Amp Blue
Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control
Module / AEB RACM MOD / Feed To AUX
PDC Relay Coils (HD Only)
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module (DS 1500 Only)
ASSY Overhead Console / SW Assist / SW 911
– If Equipped (HD Only)
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If
Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
466 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module / Cruise
Control
F83 – – No Connection
F84 – 15 Amp Blue
ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat
Switches
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column
Control Module / MOD Gateway CAN-C
Trailer TPM (HD Only)
Air Suspension / Trailer Tow / DC/DC
Converter (Voltage Stabilizer) / Steering
Column Control Module / Occupant
Classification Sensor (DS 1500 Only)
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow
IGN or BATT Customer Selectable – If Equipped
(HD Only)
Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
(DS 1500 Only)
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 467
F94 – 10 Amp Red
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch (DS 1500
Only)
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Module
TPM Trailer (HD Only) / Module Gateway
Can-C Trailer TPM (HD Only)
F95 – 10 Amp Red
Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL
Camera / Blind Spot Sensor / Surround View
Camera (HD Only)
Rear Camera / Park Assist / Blind Spot Sensor /
Compass (DS 1500 Only)
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Rear Seat Heater Switch / Trunk Lamp With
Flashlamp Charger / Truck Lamp - If Equipped
(DS 1500 Only)
Trailer Camera – If Equipped (HD Only)
F97 – 25 Amp Clear
Rear Heated Seats And Heated Steering Wheel –
If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow
Front Heated Seat Passenger – If Equipped (HD
Only)
F98 – 25 Amp Clear
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped (DS 1500
Only)
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow
Front Heated Seat Driver – If Equipped (HD
Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
468 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
F99 – 10 Amp Red
HVAC / DASM (DS 1500 Only)
HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG
MOD / Humidity Sensor (HD Only)
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped (HD Only)
F101 – 15 Amp Blue SSV Only
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Right (HD Only)
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil (HD
Only)
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS (HD Only)
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center
Console) / Trunk – If Equipped (DS 1500 Only)
UCI Port / USB Rear (HD Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use
of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly
rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in
the circuit that must be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 469
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system,
there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled to assist with changing a tire.
This feature can be activated through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a
jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
6
470 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the plastic
access cover located on the side of the front passenger’s seat.
To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest
to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab.
Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the
front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counter-
clockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly
out from under the seat.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 471
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn
the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Extension 4
6
472 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
CAUTION!
• The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is posi-
tioned correctly over the winch mechanism adjusting
nut.
• Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch mech-
anism may occur from improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Jack Driver
3 — Extension 3
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 473
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the
vehicle may move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
6
474 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until the
spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to
allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 475
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the extension
tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
6
476 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 477
(Continued)
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
478 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Lug Wrench Adaptor Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a dually
tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel covers they
must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.
Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped” in this
section.
Lug Wrench Adapter
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 479
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
Jack / Extensions Placement
6
480 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack driver
to the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension
tubes. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as
possible with the drive tubes extending to the front. Con-
nect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driver to the
jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes. Place
the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock ab-
sorber with the extension tubes extending to the rear.
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 481
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb-
wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in
order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On single
rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward
the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW)
trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave the
inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is being
replaced remove the outer wheel and replace the inner
wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a
flat face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped)
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6
482 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the lug
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or service station.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks.
Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on
the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
NOTE:
The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb-
wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in
order to lower the jack
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute
with chrome plated lug nuts.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 483
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground
and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in
checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
6
484 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly
across the wheel opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extensions through the access hole between the lower tail-
gate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mech-
anism tube.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In
Position
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 485
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtight-
ened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is
firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make
sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. Install
the jack into bracket assembly and turn the
jack-turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket
assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
6
486 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly slides into the
front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 487
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off
the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat
end of the lug wrench to hook and pull off the hub cap. Find
the opening in the hub cap, insert the lug wrench, and pull
off the cap. If you need to pry against the wheel, protect the
wheel surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first
remove the hub caps—use the procedure noted for the single
rear wheel. For the wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat
end of the lug wrench between the outer edge of the wheel
cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel to remove the
wheel cover. Repeat this procedure around the wheel until
the cover pops off.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear
wheel covers. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or
the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling
motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove
the caps.
6
488 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to ease the
installation. Align the wheel cover vent holes to the wheel
vent holes. Tap on the wheel cover as needed to firmly seat it
evenly around the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not use
a twisting motion when removing the hub cap, damage
to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pull
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack handle
driver is located squarely in the cap notch before
attempting to pull off.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts
or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 489
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a protective
cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the posi-
tive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly
off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
around the post.
Positive Battery Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands
and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin
or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from
the battery.
6
490 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the
vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable
to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury could
result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or
the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
491
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery,
let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you
should have the battery and charging system inspected at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical current
will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
6
492 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above the
parking brake release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away
if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper
connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park
Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 493
4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of
the lever) to the right.
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position,
pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward, until it
locks in place pointing towards the driver's seat. Release
the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release
lever is locked in the released position.
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its orig-
inal position, until the locking tab snaps into place to
secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is
locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the poten-
tial for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while
preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending
overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
6
494 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
• For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmission, shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
• Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant
(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by
excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously
without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 495
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled
vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to
be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Refer to "Air Suspension System — If Equipped" in "Starting
And Operating" for more information.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine
to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This
will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of trans-
mission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may
lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also
damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
ring).
6
496 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equip-
ment designed for this purpose, following equipment manu-
facturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
•Transmission in NEUTRAL
•30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
•30 miles (48 km) max distance
(8–speed transmission)
See instructions in “Recreational Towing”
under “Starting And Operating”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle
damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage
to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 497
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is
operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the
ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is OFF.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering
wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight posi-
tion) with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is
operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction,
with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information and detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
498 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Enhanced Accident Response
System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage
to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front
or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage
your vehicle.
499
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indi-
cator system. The oil change indicator system will remind
you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled main-
tenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi-
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since
last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of
engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominantly at idle, or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
7
500 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmis-
sion (six-speed only) and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace air cleaner filter.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 501
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid
level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing, change
axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings,
replace as necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
7
502 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
X
X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 503
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an
accident.
7
504 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 505
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best
time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always main-
tain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of
the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe
zone on these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-
freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the
wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing
the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield washer solu-
tion used with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clog-
ging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss
of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
7
506 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any proce-
dure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or
sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that
the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery
posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are iden-
tified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 507
Engine Oil — Gas Engine
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed
8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of
engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
508 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine
Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illus-
tration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 509
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable
oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar
engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recom-
mended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance
interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters
are a high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the
air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
7
510 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your
air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners on air
cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Hose Clamp
3 — Air Cleaner Cover
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 511
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present
before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the air cleaner filter
assembly
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system
to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor-
mation Book, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
512 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon
(HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a
low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel
dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal
injury.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 513
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the glove compart-
ment. Push inward on right side of the glove compart-
ment travel stop to disengage the stop. Then pull the right
of the glove compartment outward (away from the hinge)
to disengaging the right side of the compartment from the
hinge. Continue by removing the left side from the hinge
by slightly lowering the compartment while pulling
outward until it is completely disengaged from the hinge.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
7
514 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs
on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Finger Tabs
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 515
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of the
housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the
glove compartment sides.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove
compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
7
516 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compart-
ment door.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run
across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered
normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also
have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position
on pulley)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with
vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of igni-
tion mode. You could be injured by the moving fan
blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 517
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or
felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for
damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special
tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat
tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,
decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar
Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease
should be removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year,
preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a
high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the wind-
shield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petro-
leum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
518 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of
blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected peri-
odically, not just when wiper performance problems are
experienced. This inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt
to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass,
until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 519
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up
the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper
arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper
arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with
one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down
toward the base of the wiper arm and away from the J
hook in the end of the wiper arm).
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
7
520 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into the
hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the
wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or
if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have
an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete-
riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrica-
tion or oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 521
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventu-
ally poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and
may seriously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the
event of engine malfunction, particularly involving
engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,
have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
522 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing,
or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or
malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty
in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the
radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan
starts automatically and may start at any time, whether
the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at
any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 523
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.
Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe
internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with
the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
7
524 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level
of protection against freezing according to the tempera-
tures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 525
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accu-
mulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do
not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or
allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean
up any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the
bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no
need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze
point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month. When additional engine coolant
(antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-
heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not
remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or
under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified
for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may
result.
7
526 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of
the engine compartment. This is normally a result of mois-
ture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely
driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for
leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter oper-
ation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the
correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsat-
isfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 527
(Continued)
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated
marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid
level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be
conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on
the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-
fications” for further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The proper type
of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in
a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-
edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
7
528 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubri-
cant should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-
sion. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged,
causing partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 529
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the
factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the
vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated
(with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If
gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. This inspection should be made with
the vehicle in a level position.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/
4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle, and 12.0 in rear axle.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust
the fluid level accurately.
7
530 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tion” for further information.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in
corrosion and possible failure of differential components.
Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in
some off-highway types of service, will require draining and
refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited slip oil
additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while
turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete or
dry pavement. These conditions should be considered
normal operation of the limited slip differential.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug
hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 531
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking loca-
tions. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations.
However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on
any other parts of the underbody.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may
result.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
7
532 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the
tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires
is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT”
that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig-
nation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency
use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have
the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards
and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the side-
wall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 533
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
534 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain oper-
ating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions
(i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 535
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white side-
walls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the
outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is
approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was
manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
536 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 537
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare
tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recom-
mended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
7
538 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard
in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not
be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined
weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 539
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with
varying seating configurations and number and size of
occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and
may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity
of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
540 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 541
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satis-
factory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are
affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or
over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage
that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
542 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's
side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold
tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of
outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tempera-
ture changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 543
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions
are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (side-
wall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
7
544 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and addi-
tional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately
with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run
Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with
underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor
as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat
mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a
flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 545
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher,
and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rota-
tion of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
7
546 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little expo-
sure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil,
grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when replacement
is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica-
tors” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may have
on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,
and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating
other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combi-
nations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension compo-
nents. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 547
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If
your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient tempera-
tures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice
or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
7
548 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “moun-
tain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was
originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than
that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked before using these
tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare
tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting And
Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 549
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-
tional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is
designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
7
550 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-
tional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is
designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This
tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or
rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs
to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment
tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 551
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild
(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,
and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe
away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps
keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended
period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive
your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water drop-
lets from the brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration
when braking.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
552 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain type,
and axle recommendations:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO
NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND
WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A
SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Vehicle
Axle
Recommendations
Tire Sizes Chain Class
2500 Models Rear Only
LT245/70R17E
LT275/70R18E
U Class
2500 Power Wagon Models Rear Only LT285/70R17D U Class
3500 (Single Rear Wheel) Models Rear Only LT275/70R18E U Class
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel) Models Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 553
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rota-
tion will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and
wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance
intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between
tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten
after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
7
554 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched
for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. To check if
tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four tires. The
straight edge should touch all the tires.
Tire Rotation
555
(Continued)
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information
System (TPIS):
• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses unique
sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify them from
the outer rear wheels, because of this, the inner and outer
wheel locations can’t be switched.
• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the
system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto
learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition
status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over 5 mph
(8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may need to
drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and stops.
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization of
the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting in
incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed in the
instrument cluster.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
CAUTION!
• 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the asym-
metrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire
and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different loca-
tion, to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the
wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the truck.
For example, if the spare is used to replace an outer rear
tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the
wheel is dished inward. That way the tread design of
asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL
tires will maintain proper position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
556 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 557
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle's battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees
and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive
to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes
your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance
built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
558 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in
the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap,
and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint
finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as
steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal
and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 559
(Continued)
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the
chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road
debris and salt using an automotive soap. Bumpers should
be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,
and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They
can stain or damage the protective coating that helps keep
them from corroding and tarnishing.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have
your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner,
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
560 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well pack-
aged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or
stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV exposure
will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bedliner,
the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all
loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least
twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner Condi-
tioner available at your local authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any loose
dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth
or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe
over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on
your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as
possible to avoid permanent damage.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
slippery and may result in personal injury.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 561
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed. If
a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet
a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed
by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge, follow
the directions provided in the Mopar Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a
clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild soap
solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a
clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many
are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas
they may cause respiratory harm.
7
562 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or luke-
warm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop for
soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth until
all residue is removed.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must
be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 563
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act
as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
7
564
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left
front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the
windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle frame
etched on right hand center rail, as well as the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 565
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated
brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
“Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” (if
equipped) during brake use.
Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon)
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost
unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You
may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the
hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than
normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating
temperature.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/Bolt
Type
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
140 Ft-Lbs
(190 N·m)
Flanged
8
566 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts
are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being rotated or
replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the
interface between the lug nut/bolt and the washer. Do not
oil wheel studs.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully
engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 567
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15%
in this engine.
This engines is designed to meet all emissions regu-
lations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high quality unleaded
gasoline having a posted octane number range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause
for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso-
line with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
8
568 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a
higher level of detergents to further aide in mini-
mizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate.
Please observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol
(E-15).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 569
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a
manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into
some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with
MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline
of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso-
line retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is
prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
8
570 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-
heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel
system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not
be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage,
and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 571
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.)
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine – (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.)
16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
8
572 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil – 6.4L
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The
manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40
or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engines
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 573
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhib-
itors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
8
574 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic (For
Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for
Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5
Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front & 11.5 Rear Axles. Use
Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985) in
12.0 Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited
slip axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
575
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are
easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these
steps:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Main Menu
9
576 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features
to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft-
ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US
LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro-
priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your systems or to
reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to your vehicle systems.
MULTIMEDIA 577
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of
vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the
potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:
•Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
•Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept informa-
tion and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of
unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase
the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior,
take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer
immediately.
9
578 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features
can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 3 Settings
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Buttons On The Touch-
screen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if equipped)
to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Ucon-
nect system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power Side
Steps, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options,
Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings,
Clear Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting until the button is
highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the
back arrow or the “Done” button on the touchscreen or push
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touch-
screen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN
position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA 579
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Set Language English, Français, Español
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (UG) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
9
580 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Power — If Equipped HP (US) HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °C °F
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM”
or “PM.”
MULTIMEDIA 581
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning
— If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition
is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while
backing up.
9
582 MULTIMEDIA
Surround View Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image
with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround
View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active
guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 583
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navi-
gation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear
view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Forward Facing Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the
steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp)
Camera Dynamic Centerline
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and
hook up.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
584 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Tire Fill Assist On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the head-
lights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
MULTIMEDIA 585
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with
the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Steering Directed Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either
when the headlight switch is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
9
586 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver
door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
• The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is used to
unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 587
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
After pressing the “Power Side Steps” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with
the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
9
588 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start Only All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver's
heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
MULTIMEDIA 589
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when
vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while the
vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service.
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
9
590 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name
from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snow
mobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
MULTIMEDIA 591
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the
AUX input.
Loudness — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
592 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Variance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
• Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the
variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will auto-
matically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
• Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar
Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may
give false readings.
Perform Compass
Calibration
On Off
NOTE:
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates
the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You
may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
MULTIMEDIA 593
Compass Variance Zone Map
9
594 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel
Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
MULTIMEDIA 595
Restore Default Settings
After pressing the “Restore Default Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Default Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Default Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their
default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
9
596 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a
pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see an authorized dealer for further infor-
mation.
MULTIMEDIA 597
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped such
as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power
Side Steps (if equipped), Auto-On Comfort (if equipped),
Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings
and System Information.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN
position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
598 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all
display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate
the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
– +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
MULTIMEDIA 599
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
– +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups
Displayed In Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
600 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these
settings, press the “Custom” bar. The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Power — If Equipped
HP (US) HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °F °C
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
MULTIMEDIA 601
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours – +
Set Time Minutes – +
Time Format
12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
9
602 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while
backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image
with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround
View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
MULTIMEDIA 603
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Parkview Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi-
tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed Parkview Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines —
If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
604 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the
steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp) Camera Dynamic Centerline —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and
hook up.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while
backing up.
Surround View Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
MULTIMEDIA 605
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image
with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround
View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with
dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-
tion.
Active Parkview Backup
Camera Guidelines
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
606 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi-
tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or
aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed Parkview Backup
Camera Guidelines
On Off
Forward Facing Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the
steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp)
Camera Dynamic Centerline
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and
hook up.
Forward Collision Warning
— If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 607
NOTE:
Apples brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Power Side Steps — If
Equipped
Auto Store
Blind Spot Alert Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
Brakes the vehicle while in reverse if potential rear collision is detected.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Tire Fill Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
608 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirrors & Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the igni-
tion is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
MULTIMEDIA 609
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain
conditions.
9
610 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with
the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either
when the headlight switch is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
MULTIMEDIA 611
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
Driver Door All Doors
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
612 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key
fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors.
• When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
• With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once
only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To
Key Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
• The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 613
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
After pressing the “Power Side Steps” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver's
heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
9
614 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled
to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA 615
Air Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Suspension
Messages
All Warnings Only
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed
towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for
further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension
Modes — If Equipped
Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist
in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment
Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to an authorized dealer for information.
9
616 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name
from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snow
mobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Rear Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
MULTIMEDIA 617
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the
AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
618 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth Settings
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
— If Equipped
On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply
Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio
Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
MULTIMEDIA 619
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience
of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesir-
able channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
620 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Default Settings
After pressing the “Restore Default Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Default Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it resets clock, audio and other features to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system
software version.
MULTIMEDIA 621
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Settings
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock &
Date, Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors and
Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer, Audio
Settings, Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Reset and
System Information.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN
position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
622 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Français
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all
display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button
on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
Select Auto or Manual display mode and this allows adjustment of overall screen brightness.
Display Brightness Headlight ON - +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
Display Brightness Headlight OFF - +
MULTIMEDIA 623
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer
switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed
in Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Phone Pop-Ups Displays In Cluster On Off
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
624 MULTIMEDIA
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following will be available:
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To
configure these settings, press the “Custom” bar. The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Power — If Equipped
HP (US)
HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °F °C
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always w/Help Never
MULTIMEDIA 625
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format
AM PM
12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while
backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If
Equipped
On Off
9
626 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image
with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround
View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is
pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
Parkview Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Parkview Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “Parkview Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 627
NOTE:
The “Active Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines
to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel position when the option
is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Fixed Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the
steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp) Camera Dynamic Centerline —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and
hook up.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
628 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning
— If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Active Braking
NOTE:
Applies brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert Off Lights Lights & Chime
Power Side Step — If
Equipped
Auto Store
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Tire Fill Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
MULTIMEDIA 629
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the igni-
tion is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
9
630 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60,
or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlight Off Delay - +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
turn on approximately ten seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain
conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
MULTIMEDIA 631
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Flash Lights with Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with
the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Steering Directed Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either
when the headlight switch is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.
9
632 MULTIMEDIA
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
• When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key
fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors.
• When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door
unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped.
• With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once
only resultsin the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 633
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
• The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Vented Seat & Steering
Wheel — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering Wheel” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated
steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F
(26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
9
634 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled
to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA 635
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Suspension
Messages
All Warning Only
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed
towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for
further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension
Modes — If Equipped
Tire Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist
in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment
Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to an authorized dealer for information.
9
636 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
NOTE:
Once a Trailer is selected, press the “Use This Trailer” on the touchscreen to set this trailer as the one in current use. In each
Trailer setting, the following settings appear:
Braking Light Electric Heavy Electric
Light Electric over
Hydraulic
Heavy Electric over
Hydraulic
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name
from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmo-
bile, travel, utility, and fifth wheel.
MULTIMEDIA 637
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Right Back Left
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
9
638 MULTIMEDIA
Bluetooth
After pressing the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the
AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in
Cluster
On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply
Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio
Devices
List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio
Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA 639
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Smartphone Device
Mirroring
On Off
Enable CarPlay Projections On Off
Automatically Display
Pop-Ups in Cluster
On Off
Set as Default Device
On
Off
Projection Manager Smartphone Device Mirroring On
Smartphone Device Mirroring
Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sirius All Access Choose a Subscription Package
Add Listener Add up to five profiles
NOTE:
The “Add Listener” feature allows you to add up to five different profiles for customizing personal music or satellite radio
choices.
Listener Items Listening History List Of Options
Tune Start On Off
9
640 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that
current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience
of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesir-
able channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.
Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information
screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen
or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
MULTIMEDIA 641
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer Yes Cancel
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it resets all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it removes all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
Clear Sirius XM Data Yes Cancel
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the
system software version.
9
642 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the
various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.).
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will
tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in
the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth/CD). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
MULTIMEDIA 643
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located on the center stack, just below the instrument panel,
is the main media hub. There are four total USB Ports : Two
Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs (Type A). There
is also an AUX Port located in the middle of the USB Ports.
All four of the USB Ports include a USB Trident and a numer-
ical value one through three, which indicates that the vehicle
can support three fully-functioning USB Ports at a time. Each
USB Port will support media and charging simultaneously.
NOTE:
• The Type C USB port is the primary media port for the
radio. Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and
both ports provide charging capabilities, but only one port
can transfer data to the head unit at a time.
• Both ports share a single data connection. However, the
user cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C port, connec-
tion to the Type A port will be lost. Alternatively, if a device
is plugged into the Type C port and another device is
plugged into the Type A port, the Type C device maintains
primary connection.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
9
644 MULTIMEDIA
A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the center
console, above the Power Inverter. One is a charge only port,
and can only charge USB devices. The other USB Port allows
you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
Rear Center Console Standard (Type A) USB Ports
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port #1
2 — Mini-USB Type C Port #2
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
MULTIMEDIA 645
Applicable to only Uconnect 4/4 NAV With 8.4–inch
Display, and Uconnect 4 NAV With 12–inch Display radios,
different scenarios are shown below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB Ports, and
when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger
USB Ports:
Device Plugged In Message Screen
Phone Plugged In Message Screen
9
646 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Or USB Plugged In Message Screen
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB Port
located on the top tray of the vehicles center console.
Center Console USB Port
MULTIMEDIA 647
If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two Standard
USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX Port may be located to the
left of the center stack, just below the climate controls.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging. You can use
features, such as Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, Pandora
and others while charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if
equipped).
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
9
648 MULTIMEDIA
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found
in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations,
which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless
radios may be restricted in some situations or environments,
such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions,
you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation.
MULTIMEDIA 649
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
VOICE COMMANDS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you
need to know to control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display or the Uconnect 4C NAV With
12–inch Display system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C With
8.4–inch Display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the head-
liner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
9
650 MULTIMEDIA
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by
pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or Send/Receive A
Text
MULTIMEDIA 651
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recogni-
tion system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the touch-
screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
9
652 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription
or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
MULTIMEDIA 653
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to
learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say
“Help.” The system provides you with a list of commands.
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
9
654 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist.
• “Change source to Bluetooth”
• “Change source to AUX”
• “Change source to USB”
• “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
MULTIMEDIA 655
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the
music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre infor-
mation is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Media
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
9
656 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check Uconnect-
Phone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “Call John Smith”
• “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
MULTIMEDIA 657
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3 Phone
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
9
658 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After the
beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without me. I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or 10,
15, 20, 25, 30, 45,
60> minutes late.
Call me. Are you there yet?
I’ll call you later. I need directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
MULTIMEDIA 659
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does
not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this
feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone,
follow these four simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
9
660 MULTIMEDIA
Climate (4C/4C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the
interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will
not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Climate
MULTIMEDIA 661
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Climate
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to get
to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the
beep, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
9
662 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep,
say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C NAV WIth 8.4–inch Display Navigation
Uconnect 4C NAV WIth 12–inch Display Navigation
MULTIMEDIA 663
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the
subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on your 8.4-inch or 12–inch touch-
screen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles
purchased within the continental United States, Alaska,
Hawaii, and Canada. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder-If Equipped
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports-If Equipped**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
• **If vehicle is equipped.
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
9
664 MULTIMEDIA
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services
in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
For further information:
• U.S. residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit: siriusxm.ca/guardian
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands
and playing your favorite music in your car.
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom of
the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and acti-
vate your horn and lights remotely.
MULTIMEDIA 665
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle
or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app
to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.
NOTE:
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com(U.S.
Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a
sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel
Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information
right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “Show fuel prices”
• “Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “Show extended weather”
TIP:
Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display SiriusXM Travel
Link
9
666 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display SiriusXM Travel
Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
MULTIMEDIA 667
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Siri Eyes Free Available
9
668 MULTIMEDIA
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message,
a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it
to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so
you can still place a second call without being interrupted by
incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones
that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or
may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to
project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its
apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0
(Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to
activate Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands,
to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
MULTIMEDIA 669
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Android
Auto
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Android Auto
9
670 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0
Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or
may not be available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with
Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use
your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the
main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your
iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Apple CarPlay
MULTIMEDIA 671
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Apple CarPlay
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a
product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the US and other
countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
9
672 MULTIMEDIA
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Ucon-
nect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is
a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the
disc.
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or
anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too
high.
NOTE:
If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it
may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed,
a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or have
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before consid-
ering disc player service.
673
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can
often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific
work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done
that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle
by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service
advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many autho-
rized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal
daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make
these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally inter-
ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest infor-
mation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
10
674 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this
process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 675
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manu-
facturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's
service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of
the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the
service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi-
dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract
that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract
that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require
service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when
you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
10
676 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available
from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained
in vehicles and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 677
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the informa-
tion that students and professional technicians need in diag-
nosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete
working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or compo-
nents is written in straightforward language with illustra-
tions, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct prob-
lems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,
operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
10
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .............357
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................524
Adding Fuel.............................................................................408
Additives, Fuel ........................................................................568
Adjust
Down.......................................................................................44
Forward ..................................................................................44
Rearward................................................................................44
Up............................................................................................44
Adjustable Pedals......................................................................56
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation...............................................................249
Air Bag Warning Light.......................................................245
Enhanced Accident Response ...................................255, 498
Event Data Recorder (EDR)...............................................498
If Deployment Occurs ........................................................254
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................................................249
Maintaining Your Air Bag System....................................256
Maintenance.........................................................................256
Transporting Pets................................................................286
Air Bag Light ...........................................................180, 245, 287
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................509
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............................................511
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........................................511, 512
Air Conditioner System..........................................................511
Air Conditioning.................................................................79, 90
Air Conditioning Filter.....................................................93, 512
Air Conditioning System .........................................................91
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..........................................91
Air Filter ...................................................................................509
Air Pressure
Tires.......................................................................................542
Alarm
Panic ........................................................................................19
Security Alarm...............................................................32, 181
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.....................................................................................15
Android Auto ..........................................................................668
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..........................................523, 571
Disposal ................................................................................525
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............................................195
Anti-Lock Warning Light.......................................................187
Apple CarPlay .........................................................................670
Assist, Hill Start.......................................................................198
Audio Systems (Radio)...........................................................575
Auto Down Power Windows ..................................................95
Auto Unlock, Doors ................................................................306
679
Automatic Door Locks .............................................................39
Automatic Headlights..............................................................69
Automatic Tailgate Release ...................................................102
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)................................91
Automatic Transmission................................................301, 529
Adding Fluid .......................................................................529
Fluid And Filter Change ....................................................529
Fluid Change........................................................................529
Fluid Level Check .......................................................528, 529
Fluid Type ....................................................................528, 574
Special Additives.................................................................528
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode......................306
Auxiliary Driving Systems ....................................................208
Axle Fluid.........................................................................529, 574
Axle Lubrication......................................................................529
B
Back-Up....................................................................................397
Back-Up Camera .....................................................................397
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System.................................................322
Battery...............................................................................182, 506
Charging System Light.......................................................182
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ............................................21
Battery Saver Feature ...............................................................73
Belts, Seat .................................................................................287
Blind Spot Monitoring............................................................208
Body Builders Guide ................................................................15
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............................................517
B-Pillar Location......................................................................537
Brake Assist System................................................................197
Brake Control System .............................................................196
Brake Fluid.......................................................................527, 574
Brake System....................................................................527, 565
Fluid Check ..........................................................................527
Master Cylinder...................................................................527
Parking..................................................................................298
Warning Light......................................................................180
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..............................................301
Bulb Replacement ...................................................................446
Bulbs, Light ......................................................................289, 446
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights......................................................455
Camera......................................................................................397
Camera, Rear....................................................................397, 401
Camper .....................................................................................144
Capacities, Fluid......................................................................571
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..................................................................504, 508
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)...............................................525
Car Washes ..............................................................................558
Carbon Monoxide Warning...........................................286, 570
Cargo Light ................................................................................72
Cellular Phone .........................................................................647
11
680
Center High Mounted Stop Light.........................................453
Center Seat Storage Compartment.......................................113
Changing A Flat Tire..............................................................469
Chart, Tire Sizing ....................................................................533
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ...........193
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety........................................286
Checks, Safety..........................................................................286
Child Restraint ........................................................................258
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................................................262
Child Seat Installation ................................................275, 277
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .........................273
Infant And Child Restraints ..............................................260
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ...................................269
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .....................264
Older Children And Child Restraints..............................261
Seating Positions .................................................................263
Clean Air Gasoline..................................................................568
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................................................551
Climate Control.........................................................................79
Automatic...............................................................................83
Manual....................................................................................79
Cold Weather Operation........................................................296
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .........................................672
Compact Spare Tire ................................................................549
Contract, Service......................................................................675
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..................................525
Cooling System........................................................................522
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).............................................524
Coolant Level...............................................................522, 525
Cooling Capacity.................................................................571
Disposal Of Used Coolant..................................................525
Drain, Flush, And Refill .....................................................523
Inspection .............................................................................525
Points To Remember...........................................................526
Pressure Cap ........................................................................525
Radiator Cap ........................................................................525
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................523, 571, 572
Corrosion Protection...............................................................557
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................................354, 357
Cruise Light .....................................................................191, 192
Cupholders...............................................................................122
Customer Assistance ..............................................................673
Cybersecurity...........................................................................576
D
Daytime Running Lights..........................................................68
Dealer Service ..........................................................................506
Defroster, Rear Window ..........................................................79
Defroster, Windshield ......................................................79, 287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ....................................................77
Diagnostic System, Onboard.................................................192
681
Differential, Limited Slip .......................................................337
Disabled Vehicle Towing.......................................................495
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)..............................................525
Do Not Disturb........................................................................668
Door Ajar..................................................................................183
Door Ajar Light .......................................................................183
Door Locks
Automatic...............................................................................39
Doors...........................................................................................33
Drag And Drop Menu............................................................575
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..............................................................40
Driving
Off-Pavement.......................................................................324
Off-Road ...............................................................................324
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water ..... 437
Dual Rear Wheels ...........................................................554, 565
E
Electric Brake Control System...............................................196
Anti-Lock Brake System.....................................................195
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..........................................200, 204
Electrical Power Outlets.........................................................124
Electronic Range Select (ERS)................................................307
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ........................................200
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........................182
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ....................................309
Emergency Braking.................................................................298
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..............................................494
Hazard Warning Flasher....................................................440
Jump Starting .......................................................................488
Emission Control System Maintenance ...............................193
Engine .......................................................................................504
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................509
Block Heater.........................................................................297
Break-In Recommendations...............................................297
Compartment Identification..............................................504
Coolant (Antifreeze)............................................................572
Exhaust Gas Caution...................................................286, 570
Fails To Start.........................................................................295
Flooded, Starting .................................................................295
Fuel Requirements ......................................................567, 571
Jump Starting .......................................................................488
Oil ..........................................................................507, 571, 572
Oil Filler Cap................................................................504, 508
Oil Filter................................................................................509
Oil Reset................................................................................167
Oil Selection .................................................................507, 571
Oil Synthetic.........................................................................508
Overheating..........................................................................493
Starting..................................................................................292
Engine Oil Viscosity................................................................508
11
682
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........................255, 498
Entry System, Illuminated.......................................................76
Ethanol......................................................................................568
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................................................286, 570
Exhaust System ...............................................................286, 520
Exterior Lighting.......................................................................67
Exterior Lights...................................................................67, 289
F
Filters
Air Cleaner...........................................................................509
Air Conditioning...........................................................93, 512
Engine Oil.....................................................................509, 572
Engine Oil Disposal ............................................................508
Flashers
Turn Signals ...........................................................71, 191, 289
Flash-To-Pass.............................................................................69
Flat Tire Changing ..................................................469, 531, 548
Flat Tire Stowage ....................................................483, 531, 548
Fluid Capacities.......................................................................571
Fluid Leaks...............................................................................289
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .....................................................................................527
Fluid, Brake..............................................................................574
Fluids And Lubricants ...........................................................572
Fog Lights...........................................................................71, 451
Fold Flat Load Floor ...............................................................119
Fold-Flat Seats ...........................................................................40
Forward Collision Warning...................................................216
Four Wheel Drive....................................................................309
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .....................................................440
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .........................................................494
Front Axle (Differential).........................................................529
Fuel............................................................................................567
Adding..................................................................................408
Additives ..............................................................................568
Clean Air...............................................................................568
Ethanol..................................................................................568
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)............................................................410
Gasoline ................................................................................567
Light ......................................................................................186
Materials Added..................................................................568
Methanol...............................................................................568
Octane Rating...............................................................567, 572
Requirements ...............................................................567, 571
Tank Capacity......................................................................571
Fuses..........................................................................................457
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........................................104
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap).......................................................410
Gasoline, Clean Air.................................................................568
Gasoline, Reformulated..........................................................568
General Information ...............................................................230
683
Glass Cleaning.........................................................................563
Gross Axle Weight Rating .....................................................412
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................................................412
Guide
Body Builders ........................................................................15
GVWR.......................................................................................410
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water.....................................................................................437
Hazard Warning Flashers......................................................440
Head Restraints.........................................................................51
Head Rests .................................................................................51
Headlights................................................................................447
Automatic High Beam..........................................................68
Cleaning................................................................................558
High Beam..............................................................................68
Lights On Reminder .............................................................70
Passing....................................................................................69
Switch......................................................................................67
Heated Mirrors..........................................................................63
Heater, Engine Block ..............................................................297
Hill Descent Control...............................................................206
Hill Descent Control Indicator..............................................206
Hill Start Assist........................................................................198
Hitches
Trailer Towing .....................................................................417
Hoisting ....................................................................................531
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)........................................104
Hood Prop................................................................................101
Hood Release ...........................................................................101
Hub Caps..................................................................................487
I
Ignition........................................................................................25
Switch......................................................................................25
Illuminated Entry......................................................................76
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ...............................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror........................................57, 58, 59, 441
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .........................................................................191
Display..................................................................................165
Engine Oil Reset ..................................................................167
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning...........................................562
Integrated Trailer Brake Control...........................................421
Interior Appearance Care ......................................................561
Interior Lights............................................................................73
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).......................................77
Introduction ...............................................................................13
Inverter Outlet (115V).............................................................126
iPod/USB/MP3 Control........................................................643
11
684
J
Jack Location............................................................................469
Jump Starting...........................................................................488
K
Key Fob
Panic Alarm ...........................................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............................24, 30
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry).................21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ..................24
Keyless Enter-N-Go..........................................................36, 291
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors...................................585, 610, 631
Passive Entry..........................................................................36
Passive Entry Programming......................................610, 631
Keys.............................................................................................18
Replacement...........................................................................31
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals..............................................71
Lane Change Assist ..................................................................71
Latches......................................................................................289
Hood .....................................................................................101
Lead Free Gasoline .................................................................567
Leaks, Fluid..............................................................................289
Life Of Tires .............................................................................545
Light Bulbs.......................................................................289, 446
Lights ........................................................................................289
Air Bag..................................................................180, 245, 287
Automatic High Beam..........................................................68
Brake Assist Warning .........................................................204
Brake Warning.....................................................................180
Bulb Replacement................................................................446
Cab Top Clearance ..............................................................455
Cargo.......................................................................................72
Center Mounted Stop..........................................................453
Courtesy/Reading ................................................................74
Cruise ............................................................................191, 192
Daytime Running..................................................................68
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ...................181
Engine Temperature Warning...........................................181
Exterior............................................................................67, 289
Fog .........................................................................................451
Four Wheel Drive Indicator...............................................317
Hazard Warning Flasher....................................................440
Headlights ........................................................................67, 69
High Beam..............................................................................68
Hill Descent Control Indicator ..........................................206
Illuminated Entry ..................................................................76
Interior ..............................................................................73, 74
Lights On Reminder..............................................................70
Low Fuel ...............................................................................186
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine).............................184
Park........................................................................................191
Passing ....................................................................................69
685
Seat Belt Reminder..............................................................179
Security Alarm.....................................................................181
Service...................................................................................446
Side Marker..........................................................................457
Traction Control ..................................................................204
Transfer Case .......................................................................317
Turn Signals ...........................................71, 191, 289, 447, 452
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..............181, 191
Limited-Slip Differential................................................337, 530
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode.............................................177
Load Shed Battery Saver On .................................................177
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction..................................177
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...................................177
Loading Vehicle ......................................................................410
Tires.......................................................................................537
Locks
Automatic Door.....................................................................39
Child Protection ....................................................................39
Power Door ............................................................................35
Low Tire Pressure System .....................................................220
Lubrication, Body ...................................................................517
Lug Nuts/Bolts .......................................................................565
M
Maintenance.............................................................................100
Maintenance Free Battery ......................................................506
Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................499
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ......................184
Manual
Park Release .........................................................................492
Service...................................................................................677
Media Hub ...............................................................................643
Memory Seat..............................................................................45
Methanol...................................................................................568
Mirrors........................................................................................57
Electric Powered....................................................................60
Heated.....................................................................................63
Memory...................................................................................45
Outside....................................................................................59
Rearview.............................................................57, 58, 59, 441
Trailer Towing .......................................................................62
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.....................................................................................15
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..............................................220
Mopar Parts..............................................................................676
MP3 Control.............................................................................643
Multi-Function Control Lever .................................................67
N
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS).....................................397
New Vehicle Break-In Period................................................297
O
Occupant Restraints................................................................230
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)..............................................567
11
686
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road)................................324, 438
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement)................................324, 438
Oil Filter, Change....................................................................509
Oil Filter, Selection..................................................................509
Oil Pressure Light ...................................................................182
Oil Reset ...................................................................................167
Oil, Engine .......................................................................507, 572
Capacity................................................................................571
Change Interval...................................................................507
Dipstick.................................................................................505
Disposal ................................................................................508
Filter ..............................................................................509, 572
Filter Disposal......................................................................508
Identification Logo..............................................................507
Materials Added To............................................................508
Pressure Warning Light .....................................................182
Recommendation ........................................................507, 571
Synthetic ...............................................................................508
Viscosity .......................................................................508, 571
Onboard Diagnostic System..................................................192
Operating Precautions............................................................192
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual............................................................14, 677
Outside Rearview Mirrors.......................................................59
Overheating, Engine...............................................................493
P
Paint Care.................................................................................557
Panic Alarm ...............................................................................19
Parking Brake ..........................................................................298
ParkSense System, Rear .................................................379, 387
Passive Entry..............................................................................36
Pedals, Adjustable.....................................................................56
Personalized Main Menu .......................................................575
Pets ............................................................................................286
Pickup Box .......................................................................130, 134
Pinch Protection ........................................................................99
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..............................537
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)................................................458
Door Locks .............................................................................35
Mirrors ....................................................................................60
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........................124, 126
Seats.........................................................................................43
Side Steps................................................................................35
Sliding Rear Window............................................................96
Steering ...................................................................................60
Sunroof....................................................................................97
Windows.................................................................................94
Power Seats
Down.......................................................................................44
Forward ..................................................................................44
687
Rearward................................................................................44
Recline.....................................................................................44
Tilt ...........................................................................................44
Up............................................................................................44
Power Steering Fluid ..............................................................574
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts..........................................242
Pretensioners
Seat Belts...............................................................................242
R
Radial Ply Tires .......................................................................543
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)..........................522, 525
Radio Frequency
General Information ...........................................24, 29, 31, 38
Radio Operation......................................................................647
Rain Sensitive Wiper System...................................................78
Ramp Travel Index .................................................................324
Rear Axle (Differential) ..........................................................529
Rear Camera ............................................................................401
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails................................................142
Rear Cross Path .......................................................................213
Rear ParkSense System ..................................................379, 387
Rear Window, Sliding ..............................................................97
Reclining Rear Seats .................................................................43
Recreational Towing...............................................................430
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..........................433
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....................435
Reformulated Gasoline...........................................................568
Refrigerant................................................................................512
Release, Hood ..........................................................................101
Release, Tailgate......................................................................102
Reminder, Seat Belt.................................................................232
Remote Keyless Entry...............................................................19
Panic Alarm............................................................................19
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............................24, 30
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode........................................................29
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ...588, 613, 633
Uconnect Settings................................................588, 613, 633
Replacement Bulbs..................................................................446
Replacement Keys.....................................................................31
Replacement Tires...................................................................546
Reporting Safety Defects........................................................676
Restraints, Child......................................................................258
Restraints, Head ........................................................................51
Rotation, Tires..........................................................................553
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.................................................287
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle..............................................289
Safety Defects, Reporting.......................................................676
Safety Information, Tire .........................................................531
Safety Tips................................................................................286
Safety, Exhaust Gas.................................................................286
11
688
Schedule, Maintenance ..........................................................499
Seat Belt Reminder..................................................................179
Seat Belts ..........................................................................231, 287
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................................................237
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..........................237
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage...................237
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ................................243
Child Restraints...................................................................258
Energy Management Feature ............................................242
Extender................................................................................241
Front Seat......................................................................231, 235
Inspection .............................................................................287
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...........................................235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........................................237
Operating Instructions .......................................................235
Pregnant Women.................................................................242
Pretensioners........................................................................242
Reminder..............................................................................232
Seat Belt Extender ...............................................................241
Seat Belt Pretensioner.........................................................242
Seat Belt Reminder..............................................................232
Untwisting Procedure ........................................................237
Seat Belts Maintenance...........................................................562
Seats ................................................................................40, 42, 44
Adjustment.......................................................................40, 44
Easy Entry ..............................................................................48
Folding Floor........................................................................119
Head Restraints .....................................................................51
Memory...................................................................................45
Power ......................................................................................43
Rear Folding...........................................................................40
Reclining Rear........................................................................43
Tilting......................................................................................40
Security Alarm...................................................................32, 181
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........................................572
Sentry Key
Key Programming.................................................................30
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).........................................................30
Sentry Key Replacement ..........................................................31
Service Assistance ...................................................................673
Service Contract.......................................................................675
Service Manuals ......................................................................677
Shifting......................................................................................299
Automatic Transmission ....................................................301
Transfer Case .......................................................................316
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................................................................433
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ...........................................................................435
Side Steps, Power......................................................................35
Signals, Turn ..............................................................71, 191, 289
Siri..............................................................................................666
689
Sliding Rear Window, Power..................................................96
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)....................................................552
Snow Plow ...............................................................................427
Snow Tires................................................................................548
Spare Tire Changing...............................................................469
Spare Tire Stowage .................................................................483
Spare Tires................................................................548, 549, 550
Spark Plugs ..............................................................................572
Speed Control
Accel/Decel..........................................................................356
Cancel....................................................................................357
Resume .................................................................................357
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................................354, 357
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System..................................................322
Starting .............................................................................290, 292
Automatic Transmission....................................................291
Button......................................................................................25
Cold Weather.......................................................................296
Engine Fails To Start...........................................................295
Starting And Operating .........................................................292
Starting Procedures ................................................................292
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines).......................................290
Steering
Tilt Column............................................................................54
Wheel, Heated .................................................................54, 55
Wheel, Tilt ..............................................................................54
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............................................642
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls.............642
Steps, Power Side......................................................................35
Storage ......................................................................................111
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ......................................113
Storage, Vehicle .................................................................92, 557
Storing Your Vehicle...............................................................557
Sun Roof .............................................................................97, 100
Sunglasses Storage..................................................................130
Sunshade Operation .................................................................99
Sway Control, Trailer .............................................................205
Synthetic Engine Oil ...............................................................508
T
Tailgate .....................................................................................144
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering................................................102
Telescoping Steering Column .................................................54
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ...............................91
Tilt
Down.......................................................................................44
Up ............................................................................................44
Tilt Steering Column ................................................................54
Tip Start ....................................................................................291
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...............................537
Tire Changing..........................................................................469
Tire Markings ..........................................................................531
Tire Safety Information ..........................................................531
11
690
Tire Stowage ............................................................................483
Tires...................................................................289, 541, 548, 555
Aging (Life Of Tires)...........................................................545
Air Pressure .........................................................................541
Chains ...................................................................................552
Compact Spare.....................................................................549
Dual...............................................................................554, 565
General Information ...................................................541, 548
High Speed...........................................................................543
Inflation Pressure ................................................................542
Life Of Tires .........................................................................545
Load Capacity..............................................................537, 538
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......................186, 220
Quality Grading ..................................................................555
Radial ....................................................................................543
Replacement.........................................................................546
Rotation ................................................................................553
Safety.............................................................................531, 541
Sizes.......................................................................................533
Snow Tires............................................................................548
Spare Tires....................................................................548, 550
Spinning................................................................................544
Trailer Towing.....................................................................420
Tread Wear Indicators........................................................545
Wheel Nut Torque ..............................................................565
To Open Hood.........................................................................101
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight............................................418
Tonneau Cover ................................................................147, 558
Tonneau Cover Cleaning .......................................................558
Towing..............................................................................411, 495
Disabled Vehicle..................................................................495
Guide.....................................................................................418
Recreational..........................................................................430
Weight...................................................................................418
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..............................................430
Traction.....................................................................................436
Traction Control ......................................................................200
Traction Control Switch .........................................................200
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...................................................205
Trailer Towing.........................................................................411
Cooling System Tips ...........................................................426
Hitches ..................................................................................417
Minimum Requirements ....................................................418
Mirrors ....................................................................................62
Tips........................................................................................426
Trailer And Tongue Weight...............................................418
Wiring ...................................................................................424
Trailer Towing Guide.............................................................418
Trailer Weight..........................................................................418
Transfer Case ...........................................................................530
Electronically Shifted..........................................................309
Fluid ......................................................................................574
691
Transmission............................................................................301
Automatic.....................................................................301, 528
Fluid ......................................................................................574
Maintenance.........................................................................528
Shifting..................................................................................299
Transporting Pets....................................................................286
Tread Wear Indicators............................................................545
Turn Signals.......................................................71, 191, 447, 452
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings................578, 585, 588, 610, 613, 631, 633
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features ..................................36, 585, 588, 610, 613, 631, 633
Passive Entry Programming........................36, 585, 610, 631
Uconnect Voice Command....................................................649
Uniform Tire Quality Grades................................................555
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................104
Universal Transmitter ............................................................104
Unleaded Gasoline..................................................................567
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...........................................237
USB............................................................................................643
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area...............................................142
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..................................564
Vehicle Loading...............................................................410, 538
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.........................................15
Vehicle Storage ..................................................................92, 557
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ......................................................................16
Navigation..............................................................................16
Operating Instructions..........................................................16
Searching User Guide...........................................................16
Viscosity, Engine Oil...............................................................508
Voice Recognition System (VR) ............................................649
11
692
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions)...........185
Warnings And Cautions ..........................................................15
Warranty Information ............................................................676
Washers, Windshield .......................................................77, 505
Washing Vehicle .....................................................................558
Water
Driving Through .................................................................437
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .................................................551
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .................................................551
Wheel Covers...........................................................................487
Winch........................................................................................337
Accessories...........................................................................341
Operation..............................................................................341
Rigging Techniques ............................................................352
Usage.....................................................................................337
Wind Buffeting ....................................................................97, 99
Window Fogging ......................................................................92
Windows ....................................................................................94
Power ......................................................................................94
Rear Sliding............................................................................97
Reset Auto-Up .......................................................................95
Windshield Defroster .............................................................287
Windshield Washers...................................................76, 77, 505
Fluid ................................................................................76, 505
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................................................517
Windshield Wipers ...................................................................76
Wipers Blade Replacement....................................................517
Wipers, Intermittent .................................................................77
Wipers, Rain Sensitive..............................................................78
Wireless Charging Pad...........................................................129
DID_19ps_Ram_Truck_2500-3500_Owner_Manual_EN-US_062218.indd 1 6/22/18 4:36 PM
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright
© 2019 FCA US LLC
Second
Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19D2DJ-126-AB
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
RAM2500/3500
RAM 2500/3500
2019
DID_19ps_Ram_Truck_2500-3500_Owner_Manual_EN-US_062218.indd 1 6/22/18 4:36 PM
